EHP4 for SAP ERP 6.0
March 2010
English
Sales and Distribution (105)
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermany
Building Block Configuration Guide
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Copyright
© Copyright 2008 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.
Microsoft, Windows, Excel, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, S/390, AS/400, OS/390, OS/400, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, System i, System i5, System p, System p5, System x, System z, System z9, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli, Informix, i5/OS, POWER, POWER5, POWER5+, OpenPower and PowerPC are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group.
Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.
SAP, R/3, xApps, xApp, SAP NetWeaver, Duet, PartnerEdge, ByDesign, SAP Business ByDesign, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary.
These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.
© SAP AGPage 2 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Icons
Icon Meaning
Caution
Example
Note or Tip
Recommendation
Syntax
Typographic Conventions
Type Style Description
Example text Words or characters that appear on the screen. These include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well as menu names, paths and options.
Cross-references to other documentation.
Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of graphics and tables.
EXAMPLE TEXT Names of elements in the system. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table names, and individual key words of a programming language, when surrounded by body text, for example, SELECT and INCLUDE.
Example text Screen output. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, source code, names of variables and parameters as well as names of installation, upgrade and database tools.
EXAMPLE TEXT Keys on the keyboard, for example, function keys (such as F2) or the ENTER key.
Example text Exact user entry. These are words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation.
<Example text> Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries.
© SAP AGPage 3 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
ContentSales and Distribution.............................................................................................................11
1 Purpose..............................................................................................................11
2 Preparation........................................................................................................11
2.1 Prerequisites................................................................................................................. 11
3 Configuration......................................................................................................11
3.1 Order Scheduling...............................................................................................11
3.1.1 Defining Floats (Scheduling Margin Key) 11
3.2 SD Business Partner Configuration....................................................................12
3.2.1 Customer Control 12
3.2.1.1 Setting Up Partner Determination: Account Groups - Function Assignment. 12
3.2.1.2 Defining Customer Account Group for DUMMY Customer............................13
3.2.1.3 Partner Determination Procedure Assignment..............................................17
3.2.2 Customer Master Data 18
3.2.2.1 Defining Legal Statuses................................................................................18
3.2.2.2 Defining Customer Groups............................................................................18
3.2.2.3 Defining Sales Districts.................................................................................19
3.2.3 Customer Hierarchies 20
3.2.3.1 Assigning Sales Areas to Customer Hierarchy Types...................................20
3.2.3.2 Allowed Account Group Assignments for Customer Hierarchies...................20
3.3 Logistics Execution............................................................................................21
3.3.1 LE: Shipment Cost 21
3.3.1.1 Defining and Assigning Shipping Type Procedure Group.............................21
3.3.1.2 Assigning Purchasing Data...........................................................................22
3.3.2 LE: Routes22
3.3.2.1 Defining Shipping Types...............................................................................22
3.3.2.2 Assigning Transportation Zone to Shipping Point.........................................23
3.3.3 LE: Packaging 23
3.3.3.1 Defining Packaging Material Types...............................................................23
3.3.3.2 Defining Material Group for Packaging Materials..........................................24
3.3.3.3 Defining Allowed Packaging Materials..........................................................25
3.3.3.4 Assign Shipping Points..................................................................................27
Choose Save and then choose Back. 28
3.3.4 LE: Deliveries 28
3.3.4.1 Defining Delivery Types................................................................................28
3.3.4.2 Assignment of List Profile to Delivery Scenario.............................................30
3.4 Pricing................................................................................................................30
3.4.1 Defining Condition Tables 30
Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir tabelas de condições..............................................30
3.4.2 Defining Access Sequences 31
Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir seqüências de acesso............................................31
3.4.3 Condition Types 31
Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir tipos de condição....................................................32
3.4.4 Defining and Assigning Pricing Procedure 32
© SAP AGPage 4 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir e atribuir esquemas de cálculo...............................32
3.4.5 Defining Pricing Procedure Determination 33
Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir e atribuir esquemas de cálculo...............................33
3.4.6 Defining Document Pricing Procedure 33
Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir e atribuir esquemas de cálculo...............................33
3.5 Account Determination.......................................................................................34
3.5.1 Materials: Account Assignment Group 34
3.5.2 Customers: Account Assignment Group 34
3.5.3 Defining Account Determination Procedure 35
3.5.4 Default Values for Account Group for Customer Creation 35
3.5.5 Defining Account Keys 36
Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Class.contábil/cálculo de custos Determinação da conta de receita Definir e atribuir chave de conta........................36
YCF.............................................................................................................................. 36
Cofins Provision...........................................................................................................36
3.6 Assigning G/L Accounts.....................................................................................36
3.6.1 Cash Account Determination 44
3.7 Availability Check...............................................................................................44
3.7.1 Availability Check: Define Checking Groups44
3.7.2 Defining Material Block for Other Users 45
3.7.3 Availability Check: Defining Checking Groups Default Value 46
3.7.4 Carrying Out Control for Availability Check 46
3.7.5 Availability Check against Product Allocation: Maintaining Procedure 47
3.7.6 Availability Check against Product Allocation: Defining Object 48
3.7.7 Availability Check against Product Allocation: Specifying Hierarchy 49
3.7.8 Availability Check against Product Allocation: Defining Consumption Periods49
3.7.9 Availability Check against Product Allocation: Controlling Product Allocation 50
3.7.10 Defining Flow According to Requirement Category 51
3.8 Output Control....................................................................................................51
3.8.1 Maintaining Output Procedure 51
3.9 Output Control – Sales Documents....................................................................52
3.9.1 Maintaining Output Types: Output Types 52
3.9.2 Maintaining Output Types: Message Types 53
3.10 Output Control – Shipping..................................................................................54
3.10.1 Maintaining Output Types 54
3.10.2 Assigning Output Determination Procedures 55
3.10.3 Maintaining Output Types - Partner Function 55
3.11 Output Control – Billing......................................................................................56
3.11.1 Maintaining Output Types 56
3.11.2 Assigning Output Determination Procedures 57
3.11.3 SD Output Determination - Billing Partner Functions57
3.12 Defining Print Parameters..................................................................................58
3.12.1 Defining Print Parameters Sales Organization 58
3.12.2 Defining Print Parameters Shipping 59
3.13 Output Control – Picking SD..............................................................................59
3.13.1 Output Determination for Picking List 59
© SAP AGPage 5 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.13.2 Maintaining Print Parameter for SD Picking 60
3.14 Product Specific Settings...................................................................................61
3.14.1 Maintaining Procedure Determination in Background for Product Proposal 61
3.14.2 Maintaining Procedure Determination Online for Product Proposal 61
3.14.3 Assigning Document Procedure to Sales Document Type 62
3.15 Defining Item Category Groups..........................................................................62
3.16 Determining Active Receivables per Item Category...........................................63
3.17 Changing controllable error messages shipping processing..............................64
3.18 Sales Order Processing I...................................................................................64
3.18.1 Defining Number Ranges for Sales Documents 64
3.18.2 Defining Sales Document Types 65
3.18.3 Sales Organizations - Assigning Order Type 66
Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Cabeçalho de documento de vendas Atribuir área de vendas a tipos de documento de vendas...66
3.18.4 Divisions by Sales Org - Assign Order Type67
Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Cabeçalho de documento de vendas Atribuir área de vendas a tipos de documento de vendas...67
3.18.5 Distribution by Sales Org - Assign Order Type 67
Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Cabeçalho de documento de vendas Atribuir área de vendas a tipos de documento de vendas...67
3.18.6 Assigning Sales Area to Sales Document Types 68
3.18.7 Assigning Sales Area to Credit Control Area 69
3.18.8 Defining Relevant Item Categories 69
3.18.9 Defining Incompleteness Procedures 70
Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Dados incompletos Definir esquemas de dados incompletos..................................................................................................70
3.18.10 Assigning Incompleteness Procedures 70
Logistics Execution Expedição Bases Controle de dados incompletos para fornecimentos Atribuir esquemas de dados incompletos.........................................71
3.18.11 Defining and Assigning Text Determination Procedures 71
3.18.12 Assigning Material Determination Procedures to Sales Document Types 72
Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação de material Atribuir esquemas aos tipos de doc.vendas.............................................................................72
3.19 Down Payment Configuration............................................................................72
3.19.1 Defining Billing Plan Types 72
Vendas e distribuição Faturamento Programa de faturamento Definir tipo de programa de faturamento.............................................................................................72
3.19.2 Date category 73
3.19.3 Defining and Assigning Item Category YBAO 73
Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Item do documento de vendas Definir categorias de item............................................................................73
3.20 Defining Item Categories for Deliveries..............................................................74
3.21 Assigning Item Categories.................................................................................75
3.22 Copying Control: Sales Document to Billing Document.....................................75
Vendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Atualizar controle de cópia para docs.faturamento Controle de cópia: doc.vendas doc.faturamento...........................................................................................................75
3.23 Specifying Copy Controls for Deliveries.............................................................76
Logistics Execution Expedição Controle de cópia Determinar controle de cópia para fornecimentos.............................................................................................76
© SAP AGPage 6 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.24 Determination of requirement types using transaction.......................................77
Logistics Execution Expedição Bases Transf.necessidades Determinação do tipo de necessidade através da operação...............................................................77
3.24.1 Defining Delivery Item Category 78
Logistics Execution Expedição Fornecimentos Definir tipos de item para fornecimentos...............................................................................................................78
3.24.2 Defining and Assigning Text Determination Procedures 78
3.24.2.1 Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Controle de texto Definir e atribuir esquemas de texto...........................................................................................79
3.25 SIS Configuration...............................................................................................79
3.25.1 SIS Header Configuration 79
Logística geral Sistema de informação para logística (SIL) Logistics Data Warehouse Controle da atualização Configurações Vendas Grupo de atualização Atribuir grupo de atualização a nível de cabeçalho..............................79
3.25.2 SIS Item Configuration 80
3.25.2.1 Activate SIS Info Structures......................................................................81
3.26 LE Output Control..............................................................................................82
3.26.1 Maintaining output determination procedures for outbound deliveries 82
3.26.2 Maintaining Output Determination Procedure for Shipping Units - Control 82
3.27 Sales Order Processing II..................................................................................83
3.27.1 Maintaining Copy Control for Sales Documents (QT) 83
3.27.2 Assigning Item Categories 85
Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Item do documento de vendas Definir categorias de item............................................................................85
3.27.3 Defining Item Categories 85
Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Item do documento de vendas Definir categorias de item............................................................................85
3.27.4 Setting up Partner Determination Procedure Assignment for Item categories 86
Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação de parceiro Definir determinação do parceiro.............................................................................................86
3.27.5 Maintaining Item Category Assign Text Determination Procedure 87
3.27.5.1 Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Controle de texto Definir e atribuir esquemas de texto...........................................................................................87
3.27.6 Assigning Incompleteness Procedures 88
Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Dados incompletos Atribuir esquemas de dados incompletos..................................................................................................88
3.27.7 Maintaining Copying Control Delivery Document to Billing Document 88
1.4 PREPARE SD BRAZILIAN LOCALIZATION (O035)..........................................90
3.27.8 SD BILLING 90
3.27.8.1 Billing: Document Types...........................................................................90
3.27.9 SD SALES DOCUMENTS 93
3.27.9.1 Incompletion Log.......................................................................................93
3.27.9.2 Maintain Sales Order Types......................................................................96
3.27.9.3 Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types (BR)...............................102
3.27.9.4 Assign Price Procedure to Billing type....................................................103
3.27.9.5 Assign Incompletion Procedures For Sales Document Type..................104
3.27.10 SD SALES DOCUMENT ITEM CATEGORIES 105
3.27.10.1 Define Item Categories for sales order...................................................105
3.27.10.2 Assign Item categories............................................................................110
3.27.10.3 Define Item Categories for Delivery........................................................111
© SAP AGPage 7 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.27.10.4 Defining Item Category Determination in Deliveries................................113
3.27.10.5 Assign Schedule Line.............................................................................113
3.27.11 SD LOCALIZATION BRAZIL ASSIGN NF 115
3.27.11.1 Assign Nota Fiscal to Sales Order..........................................................115
3.27.11.2 Maintain Sales Document Item Category................................................116
3.27.11.3 Maintain Billing Types.............................................................................117
3.27.11.4 Maintain Billing Document Item Category...............................................118
3.27.11.5 Maintain Automatic Nota Fiscal Texts.....................................................119
3.27.11.6 Define Brazilian Tax Regions and Assign to Geograph. Regions...........121
3.27.12 SD Copy control for documents121
3.27.12.1 Maintain Copy Control Billing to Sales Document...................................121
3.27.12.2 Maintain Copy Control Sales Document to Delivery...............................125
3.27.12.3 Maintain Copy Control Sales Document to Billing...................................128
3.27.12.4 Maintain Copy Control Delivery to Billing................................................130
3.27.12.5 Maintain Copy Control Sales Doc. to Sales Doc.....................................132
3.28 SD TAXBRA – Localization Brazil....................................................................133
3.28.1 SD TAXBRA - LOCALIZATION BRAZIL - PART 1 133
3.28.1.1 Field Catalog...........................................................................................133
3.28.1.2 Define Sequence for SD Tax Code Determination..................................136
3.28.1.3 Define Customer Groups for SubTrib Calculation...................................137
3.28.1.4 Define Access Sequences......................................................................138
3.28.2 SD TAXBRA - LOCALIZATION BRAZIL - PART 2 146
3.28.2.1 Define And Assign Pricing Procedure.....................................................146
3.28.2.2 Define Condition Types...........................................................................152
3.28.3 SD TAXBRA - LOCALIZATION BRAZIL - PART 3 157
3.28.3.1 Assign Condition Types to Internal Codes for Tax Conditions................157
3.28.3.2 Assign Condition Tables to Tax Tables...................................................160
3.28.3.3 Assign Condition Type to Withholding Tax Type.....................................161
3.28.3.4 Tax Codes SD.........................................................................................162
3.28.3.5 Tax Codes MM/FI...................................................................................164
3.28.3.6 Define Official Collection Codes..............................................................165
3.28.3.7 Map SD Tax Values to Nota Fiscal Fields...............................................166
3.28.3.8 Special Conditions for Pricing.................................................................167
3.28.3.9 Define Sequence for Tax Law Determination..........................................168
3.28.4 SALES DOCUMENTS BRAZILIAN LOCALIZATION168
3.28.4.1 Assign Output Determination Procedures...............................................168
3.28.4.2 Define and Assign Account Keys............................................................169
3.28.4.3 Assign Document Procedure for Product Proposal to Sales Document..170
3.28.4.4 Define Industry Sector for Customers.....................................................170
3.28.4.5 Define Shipping Conditions by Sales Document Type............................171
3.28.5 Pricing Procedures: Determination in Sales Docs. 172
3.28.6 Calculation Procedures for CBT Calculation173
3.28.7 Assign Business Area to Plant/Valuation Area and Division 173
3.28.8 Define Wich Taxes are included in SD Price Conditions 174
3.28.9 Assign Nota Fiscal to Sales Order 175
3.28.10 DEFINE TAX RELEVANCY OF MASTER RECORDS 175
3.28.10.1 DEFINE TAX RELEVANCY OF MASTER RECORDS - Customer.........175
3.28.10.2 DEFINE TAX RELEVANCY OF MASTER RECORDS - Material............176
© SAP AGPage 8 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.29 MANUAL ACTIVITIES......................................................................................176
3.29.1 Activation of Tax Codes 176
3.29.2 Maintain Specific Tax Type ICMO 178
4 MASTER DATA................................................................................................179
3.1.1 Create Output Tax Record (IBRX) 179
3.1.2 Create Initial Tax Rates 100% 179
3.1.3 Create Initial Base Rates 100%180
3.1.4 Create Initial Base Rates 100%180
3.1.5 Nota Fiscal Condition Records 180
3.1.6 Create Initial PIS Tax Rate 181
3.1.7 Create Initial COFINS Tax Rate 181
5 BRAZILIAN LOCALIZATION............................................................................183
5.1 Nota Fiscal Electronic (NF-e)...........................................................................183
3.1.1 Purpose 183
3.1.2 Preparation 183
5.2 Prerequisites....................................................................................................183
3.2.1 Define Forms - NF-e 183
3.2.2 Define Number Groups - NF-e 183
3.2.3 Condition types for Output Determination –NF-e 184
5.2.3.1 Condition types for Nota Fiscal Parallel Process (Optional)........................185
3.2.4 Maintain Number Ranges for NF-e 186
3.2.5 Assign Numbering and Printing Parameters – NF-e 186
3.2.6 Output Determination Procedure 187
3.2.7 Create Condition Record - NF-e 188
3.2.8 Define Nota Fiscal Types 188
3.2.9 Define NF Type Redetermination for Goods Movements194
3.2.10 Defining Business Places 195
3.2.11 Defining NF Type Redetermination per Business Place 195
3.2.12 Assign XML Version to Region 196
3.2.13 Defining SEFAZ Status Codes 197
3.2.14 Defining Cancellation Reasons 204
3.2.15 Defining IPI Tax Situations 205
3.2.16 Defining PIS Tax Situations 206
3.2.17 Defining COFINS Tax Situations 207
3.2.18 Defining IPI Tax Laws 208
3.2.19 Defining PIS Tax Laws 211
3.2.20 Defining COFINS Tax Laws 214
3.2.21 Maintain Tax Law PIS/COFINS 218
3.2.22 Maintain Tax Law PIS/COFINS SD 219
3.2.23 Defining Screen Control Groups 220
3.2.24 Assigning Screen Control Group 222
3.2.25 CBT: Mapping of SubTrip Base Reduction 223
5.2.25.1 Create New Conditions for MM and SD..................................................223
5.2.25.2 Maintain Calculation Procedure TAXBRA / YVABRA.............................223
5.2.25.3 Create New Internal Codes.....................................................................224
5.2.25.4 Assing Internal Codes to Conditions.......................................................224
3.2.26 Defining Tax Jurisdiction Codes 225
3.2.27 Assigning Postal Codes to Tax Jurisdiction Codes 225
© SAP AGPage 9 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.2.28 Contingency Rules for Plant 225
6 Appendix..........................................................................................................226
© SAP AGPage 10 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Sales and Distribution
1 PurposeThis configuration guide provides the information you need to set up the configuration of this building block manually.
If you do not want to configure manually and prefer an automated installation process using the SAP Best Practices Installation Assistant and other tools, refer to the SAP Best Practices Quick Guide.
2 Preparation
2.1 PrerequisitesBefore you start installing this building block, you must install prerequisite building blocks. For more information, see the Building Block Prerequisite Matrix for Baseline. The matrix (an Excel file) is linked on the solution's DVD/website in one of the following two locations:
Content Library
Site Map
3 Configuration
3.1 Order Scheduling
3.1.1 Defining Floats (Scheduling Margin Key)
Use The purpose of this step is to define the scheduling margin key.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Production Shop Floor Control Operations Scheduling Define Scheduling Margin Key
Menu IMG Produção Controle de produção Operações Programação Definir chave de horizonte
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Margins for scheduling”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
© SAP AGPage 11 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3. Make the following entries:
Plant Key Name 1 Opening Period
Float After Production
Float Before Production
Release Period
1000 000 Centro 1 000 000 000 000
1000 001 Centro 1 010 001 002 005
1100 000 Centro 2 000 000 000 000
1100 001 Centro 2 010 001 002 005
4. Choose Save.
3.2 SD Business Partner Configuration
3.2.1 Customer Control
3.2.1.1 Setting Up Partner Determination: Account Groups - Function Assignment
UseIn this activity, you define the rules that should be used to perform automatic partner determination.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Partner Determination Set up Partner Determination
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação de parceiro Definir determinação do parceiro
Transaction Code SM34 (customizing object VC_TPAR_KU)
2. In the Choose Activity dialog box, double-click Set Up Partner Determination for Customer Master.
3. On the Change View “Partner Determination Procedures”: Overview screen, double-click Account Groups – Function Assignment.
4. Choose New Entries.
5. In the Account Groups – Function Assignment table, enter the following data:
Partn.Funct Account Grp
1B YB01
1C YB01
1D YB01
1D 0003
AA YB01
SP YB01
AW YB01
BP YB01
BP 0003
© SAP AGPage 12 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Partn.Funct Account Grp
PY YB01
PY 0003
SB YB01
SO YB01
SH YB01
SH YBVC
SP YBEC
SP YBAC
BP YBEC
PY YBEC
SH YBEC
BP YBAC
PY YBAC
SH YBAC
SP YBPC
BP YBPC
PY YBPC
SH YBPC
1B YB03
1C YB03
1D YB03
AA YB03
SP YB03
AW YB03
BP YB03
PY YB03
SB YB03
SO YB03
SH YB03
6. Choose Save; then choose Back.
3.2.1.2 Defining Customer Account Group for DUMMY Customer
UseThis activity defines the customer account group for the DUMMY customer.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
© SAP AGPage 13 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics General Business Partner Customers Control Define Account Groups and Field Selection for Customers
Menu IMG Logística geral Parceiro de negócios Clientes Controle Definir grupos de contas e seleção de campos clientes
Transaction Code OVT0
2. On the Change View “Customer Account Groups”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
Field Name User Action and Values
Account Group YBPC Dummy customer
Number range XX
CentrTextDetPrc 01
TextDetProc SD 01
Cust.pric.proc. 1
Partner DetermProced AG
Default SP Checked
4. Double-click the General Data text, and expand the Field Status Group.
5. On the Maintain Field Status Group: Overview screen, set the radio buttons in each group as follows:
Field Name Values
Group Address
Suppress Search term B, Street 5, Buildings, Company postal code, Comments, Regional structure grouping, Sex, Date of birth, Marital status, Academic title, Name prefix, 2. academic title, 2nd prefix, Name at Birth, Nickname, Name affix, Initials, Country for format, Format name, Alternative place of residence, P.O. box without number, PO box country, PO Box Region, Name Formatting, Undeliverable Street, Undeliverable Postbox
Req. Entry Name 1/Last name, Search Term A, Postal code, city,
Opt. Entry Mark the rest optional
Display N/A
Group Communication
Suppress Mobile Telephone
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark the rest optional
Display N/A
Group Control
Suppress Reference account group (OTA), Business Place, Tax Type, Tax categories.
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark the rest optional
© SAP AGPage 14 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Field Name Values
Display N/A
Group Marketing
Suppress N/A
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark all optional
Display N/A
Group Payment Transactions
Suppress N/A
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark all optional
Display N/A
Group Unloading points
Suppress N/A
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark all optional
Display N/A
Group Contact person
Suppress N/A
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark all optional
Display N/A
Group Foreign Trade
Suppress N/A
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark all optional
Display N/A
6. Choose Save and then choose Back.
7. Select the Company code data text and then expand Field Status Group.
8. On the Maintain Field Status Group: Overview screen, set the radio buttons in each group as follows:
Field Name Values
Group Account Management
Suppress Personnel number, Gross income tax, Value adjustment key
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark the rest optional
Display N/A
Group Payment transactions
© SAP AGPage 15 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Field Name Values
Suppress Credit memo terms of payment, Diff. Payer in document, Accts recble pledging ind.
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark the rest optional
Display N/A
Group Correspondence
Suppress N/A
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark the rest optional
Display N/A
Group Insurance
Suppress N/A
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark all optional
Display N/A
Group W/holding tax data, w/h tax 2
Suppress Withholding tax code (2), Withholding tax number, Withholding tax types
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry W/hold.tax deduction, w/h tax 2
Display N/A
9. Choose Save and then choose Back.
10. Select the Sales data text and then expand Field Status Group.
11. On the Maintain Field Status Group: Overview screen, set the radio buttons in each group as follows:
Field Name Values
Group Sales
Suppress N/A
Req. Entry Pricing procedure, Currency
Opt. Entry Mark the rest optional
Display N/A
Group Shipping
Suppress Rail specifications
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark the rest optional
Display N/A
Group Billing
Suppress Hedging and credit contr. Area
© SAP AGPage 16 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Field Name Values
Req. Entry Taxes and licenses
Opt. Entry Mark the rest optional
Display N/A
Group Partner usage
Suppress N/A
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark all optional
Display N/A
Group Documents
Suppress N/A
Req. Entry N/A
Opt. Entry Mark all optional
Display N/A
12. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.2.1.3 Partner Determination Procedure Assignment
UseThis activity will assign the account groups to the partner determination procedure.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Master Data Business Partners Customers Customer Hierarchy Set Partner Determination for Hierarchy Categories
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação de parceiro Definir determinação do parceiro
Transaction Code SM34 (customizing object VC_TPAR_KU)
2. Choose Set Up Partner Determination for Customer Master.
3. On the Partner Determination Procedures: Overview screen and choose Partner Determination Procedure Assignment: Overview.
4. On the Partner Determination Procedure Assignment: Overview screen make the following assignments:
Group Description Partner Determination Procedure
Name
YB01 Sold-to party AG Sold-To Party
YB02 Customer (ext.number assgnmnt)
AG Sold-To Party
© SAP AGPage 17 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Group Description Partner Determination Procedure
Name
YB03 Sold-to party Demo (int.Numb.)
AG Sold-To Party
YBAC Affiliated Companies - BP
AG Sold-To Party
YBEC Export Customers - BP
AG Sold-To Party
YBOC One-time cust.(ext.no.assgnmt)
AG Sold-To Party
YBPC Dummy customer AG Sold-To Party
YBVC Vendor_AT WE Ship-to party
5. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.2.2 Customer Master Data
3.2.2.1 Defining Legal Statuses
UseThis activity will define the possible business forms which a customer can have (for example, corporation or limited liability company). You specify the business form in the general data of the customer master record as part of the marketing information (which specifies a business form for all sales areas).
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Master Data Business Partners Customers Marketing Define Legal Statuses
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Dados mestre Parceiro negócios Clientes Marketing Definir tipo de sociedade
Transaction Code OVR6
2. On the Change View “Legal Status (Customer Master):” Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following data:
Legal Status Description
01 Legal status 01
06 Ltd
07 Inc
10 Corp
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
© SAP AGPage 18 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.2.2.2 Defining Customer Groups
Use
In this menu option, you define the customer groups to which a customer can belong. You specify the customer group for sales data in the customer master record for each sales area. The SAP system copies this specification automatically into the sales documents at header and item level. Here, you will find the customer group on the detail screen for general business data.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Master Data Business Partners Customers Sales Define Customer Groups
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Dados mestre Parceiro negócios Clientes Venda Definir grupos de clientes
Transaction Code OVS9
2. On the Change View “Customer groups”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following data:
Cgrp Name
01 Industry
02 Retail
03 Wholly-owned subsid.
04 Partly owned subsid.
05 Competition
06 Public sector
07 Private customer
08 Wholesale
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.2.2.3 Defining Sales Districts
UseIn this menu option, you define the sales districts in which the customers' subsidiaries can be located. You specify the sales districts for the sales data in the customer master record for each sales area.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Master Data Business Partners Customers Sales Define Sales Districts
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Dados mestre Parceiro negócios Clientes Venda Definir região de vendas
Transaction Code OVR0
© SAP AGPage 19 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
2. On the Change View “Customers: Sales Districts”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following data:
Sales district District name
000001 Northern Brazil
000002 Southern Brazil
000003 Southeastern Brazil
000004 Northeastern Brazil
000005 Central West Brazil
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.2.3 Customer Hierarchies
3.2.3.1 Assigning Sales Areas to Customer Hierarchy Types
UseThis activity will assign sales areas to each other, which allows you to determine whether a sales area uses its own customer hierarchies or shares one with another sales area.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Master Data Business Partners Customers Customer Hierarchy Assign Sales Areas
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Dados mestre Parceiro negócios Clientes Venda Atualizar campos de reserva no mestre de cliente
Transaction Code OVH3
2. On the Change View “Customer Hierarchy: Allowed Sales Area Assignments”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries.
CustType Sales Org. Distr.Chl Division HgLvSlsOrg HLDstrCh HgLvDivis.
A 1000 10 10 1000 10 10
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.2.3.2 Allowed Account Group Assignments for Customer Hierarchies
UseThis activity will assign the possible higher-level account groups to the account groups permitted for each customer hierarchy type. Therefore, both the valid account groups for each hierarchy type are defined and the higher-level account groups of the valid account groups. This will prevent the system assigning a ship-to party above a sold-to party.
Procedure
© SAP AGPage 20 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Carry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Master Data Business Partners Customers Customer Hierarchy Assign Account Groups
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Dados mestre Parceiro negócios Clientes Hierarquia clientes Atribuir grupos contas
Transaction Code OVH2
2. On the Change view “Allowed Acct. Grp Assign. For Cust. Hier.”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following data:
CustHType Acct Group Hg Lv Acct Gr
A 0001 0012
A YB01 YB01
A YB01 0003
A YB01 YB02
A 0012 0012
A 0012 0003
A 0003 0003
A YB02 YB01
A YB02 0012
A YB02 0003
A YB02 YB02
A YB01 0012
A 0003 0012
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.3 Logistics Execution
3.3.1 LE: Shipment Cost
3.3.1.1 Defining and Assigning Shipping Type Procedure Group
UseThis activity defines the pricing procedure. You also assign transactions to the pricing procedure transactions by defining the following dependencies for:
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Transportation Shipment Costs Pricing Pricing Control Define and Assign Pricing Procedures
© SAP AGPage 21 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Transporte Custos de frete Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir e atribuir esquemas de cálculo
Transaction Code T_72
2. Double-click Define and assign shipping type procedure group.
3. Choose New Entries, and enter the following data:
Field Name Description User action and values Comment
ShipTypGrp 0005
Description Air
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
5. Double-click Dialog Structure Assign shipping type procedure group.
6. In the 05 Airplane row, in the ShpTyp Grp row, enter 0005.
7. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.3.1.2 Assigning Purchasing Data
UseFor settlement, you must assign the organizational units in the shipment to the relevant organizational units in purchasing. These settings are necessary for creating accruals. The accruals are posted using service entry sheets. The purchasing organizational units are needed for service procurement.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Transportation Shipment Costs Settlement Assign Purchasing Data
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Transporte Custos de frete Liquidação Atribuir dados de compras
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVFP)
2. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
TPPt SCTy POrg PGr Plnt
1000 0001 1000 100 1000
3. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.3.2 LE: Routes
3.3.2.1 Defining Shipping Types
UseIn this activity, you define the shipping types in combination with the mode of transport.
Procedure
© SAP AGPage 22 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Carry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Routes Define Routes Define Shipping Types
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Itinerários Definição de itinerários
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_T173_COM)
2. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
PT Description MdTr StPG
05 Airplane 05 0005
3. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.3.2.2 Assigning Transportation Zone to Shipping Point
UseIn this step you assign the Transportation Zone to the Shipping Point.
Procedure 1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistic Execution → Shipping → Basic Shipping Functions → Routes → Route Determination → Maintain Country and Transportation Zone For Shipping Point
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Bases Itinerários Determinação de itinerários Atualizar país e zona de transporte para local de expedição
Transaction Code SPRO / SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVST_RF)
2. Make the following entries:
ShPt Ctry Zone
1000 BR BR00040000
100R BR BR00010000
1100 BR BR00040000
110R BR BR00040000
3. Save your entries.
3.3.3 LE: Packaging
3.3.3.1 Defining Packaging Material Types
Use
The packaging material type combines packaging materials into groups and contains essential control features which apply to the corresponding shipping materials. When you specify a shipping material type in the material master record, each shipping material is assigned to a shipping material type.
Procedure
© SAP AGPage 23 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Carry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics – General Handling Unit Management Basics Define Packaging Material Types
Menu IMG Logística geral Administração de unidades comerciais Bases Definir tipos de meios auxiliares de expedição
Transaction Code VHAR
2. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
Packag. mat type
Output Det Proc
Output Type
Sort Plant determin.
Pack. matl cat.
Number assgnmt
Int. interval
External Interval
YB09 Barrel
000001 MALB 0000 A C B 01
YB10 Reefer box
000001 MALB 0000 A C B 01 02
YB11 Reefer container
000001 MALB 0000 A C B 01 02
YB12 Chep-Pallets 1/2
000001 MALB 0000 B D B 01 02
YB13 Tank lorry
0000 B A B 01 02
YB14 Chep-Pallets 1/4
000001 MALB 0000 B D B 01 02
YB15 Bottle
000001 MALB 0000 B C B 01
0001 Pallets
000001 MALB 0000 B D B 01 02
0002 Container
000001 MALB 0000 A C B 01 02
0003 Ship 0000 A A B 01 02
YB04 Truck
0000 A A B 01 02
YB05 Cardboard box
000001 MALB 0000 B C B 01 02
YB06 Case
000001 MALB 0000 B C B 01 02
YB07 Box 000001 MALB 0000 B C B 01 02
YB08 Waggon
0000 A B B 01 02
3. Choose Save and then choose Back.
© SAP AGPage 24 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.3.3.2 Defining Material Group for Packaging Materials
UseIn this menu option, you define material groupings packaging materials, with which materials that are to be packed into similar packaging materials are grouped together. The material grouping for packaging materials is entered in the material master record of the shipping material.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics – General Handling Unit Management Basics Define Material Group for Packaging Materials
Menu IMG Logística geral Administração de unidades comerciais Bases Definir grupo de materiais p/meios auxiliares de expedição
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVEGR)
2. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
GrPMt Description
YB01 Pallets
YB02 Container
YB03 Case
YB04 Card Box
YB05 Bulk goods
YB06 Single parts
YB07 Small packed part
YB08 Loose liquid prod
YB09 Reefer cargo
YB10 Truck
YB12 Chep-Pallets 1/2
YB14 Chep-Pallets 1/4
3. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.3.3.3 Defining Allowed Packaging Materials
UseWhen you pack materials or handling units, the system checks if the packaging materials for the handling unit (to which the items are to be packed) are allowed for packing. By assigning packaging material types to the material groups for packaging materials, you define which packaging materials are allowed for packing. By assigning shipping material types to material groups for shipping materials, you define which shipping materials are allowed for packing.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
© SAP AGPage 25 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
IMG Menu Logistics - General Handling Unit Management Basics Define Allowed Packaging Materials
Menu IMG Logística geral Administração de unidades comerciais Bases Determinar materiais de embalagem permitidos
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TERVH)
2. Choose New Entries and maintain the following data:
Mat Grp PM PkgMtlType
YB01 0001
YB01 YB04
YB01 YB08
YB02 0002
YB02 0003
YB02 YB04
YB02 YB08
YB03 0001
YB03 0002
YB03 YB04
YB03 YB06
YB03 YB08
YB04 0001
YB04 0002
YB04 YB04
YB04 YB05
YB04 YB08
YB05 0003
YB05 YB04
YB05 YB08
YB06 0002
YB06 YB06
YB06 YB07
YB07 YB05
YB07 YB06
YB07 YB07
YB08 YB09
YB08 YB15
YB09 YB10
YB09 YB11
YB10 YB04
© SAP AGPage 26 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Mat Grp PM PkgMtlType
YB12 YB04
YB12 YB08
YB12 YB12
YB14 YB04
YB14 YB08
YB14 YB14
3. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.3.3.4 Assign Shipping Points
UseIn this menu option, you allocate the shipping points to the desired combinations of shipping condition and loading group for each plant.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination Assign Shipping Points
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Determinação de local de expedição/dpto.entrada mercadorias Atribuir locais de expedição
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVSTZ)
2. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
SC LGrp Plnt PrShP
01 0001 1000 1000
01 0001 1000 1000
01 0001 1000 1000
01 0001 1000 1000
01 0001 1000 1000
01 0002 1000 1000
01 0002 1000 1000
02 0002 1000 1000
02 0002 1000 1000
02 0002 1000 1000
02 0003 1000 1000
© SAP AGPage 27 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
SC LGrp Plnt PrShP
02 0003 1000 1000
02 0003 1000 1000
03 0003 1000 1000
03 0003 1000 1000
03 0001 1100 1100
03 0001 1100 1100
03 0001 1100 1100
04 0001 1100 1100
04 0001 1100 1100
04 0001 1100 110R
04 0002 1100 1100
04 0002 1100 1100
RE 0002 1100 1100
RE 0002 1100 1100
RE 0002 1100 1100
RE 0003 1100 1100
RE 0003 1100 1100
RE 0003 1000 1000
RE 0003 1000 1000
Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.3.4 LE: Deliveries
3.3.4.1 Defining Delivery Types
UseIn this menu option you define your delivery types which represent the different business transactions in shipping.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
© SAP AGPage 28 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Deliveries Define Delivery Types
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Fornecimentos Definir tipos de remessa
Transaction Code 0VLK
2. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
Field Name Description User action and values Notes
Delivery type LF Delivery
Document cat. J Delivery
NR int. assgt 17
No.range.ext 18
ItemNoIncrement 10
Order required Sales order required
Defautl ord. Ty. DL Order Type Sched
ItemRequirement 202 Order w.indep.item
Stor.loc.rule MALA
OutputDetProc V10000
TextDetermProc 02
Output Type YBL1
Application V2
Route determin. New route determination with check
PartnDetProc LF
Distrbtn Mode Distribution at Delivery
Screen seq.grp LF
Display range All items
Field Name Description User action and values Notes
Delivery type NL IntPlant Stock Dely
Document cat. J Delivery
NR int. assgt 17
No.range.ext 18
ItemNoIncrement 10
Order required Purchase order required
Defautl ord. Ty. DL Order Type Sched
ItemRequirement 202 Order w.indep.item
© SAP AGPage 29 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Stor.loc.rule MALA
OutputDetProc V10000
TextDetermProc 02
Output Type LD00
Application V2
Route determin. No new route determination
PartnDetProc LF
Distrbtn Mode Distribution control by warehouse number
Screen seq.grp LF
Display range All items
3. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.3.4.2 Assignment of List Profile to Delivery Scenario
UseThis activity will assign a List Profile to a Delivery Creation profile.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Worklists Assignment of List Profile to Delivery Scenario
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Listas de trabalho Atribuição dos perfis da lista aos cenários de fornecimento
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_T186V)
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Make the following entries:
Scenario Description Profile name
Selection screen Dlv creation profile
500A Schedule background processing
5001 5 - Schedule batch jobs without tab
0101
4. Choose Save.
3.4 Pricing
3.4.1 Defining Condition Tables
UseIn this IMG activity, you define price dependencies. You can make prices, surcharges, and discounts dependent on almost all the fields in a document. You define these dependencies using the condition tables. In a condition table, you define the combination of fields for which you can create condition records.
Procedure
© SAP AGPage 30 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Carry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define Condition Tables
IMG Menu Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir tabelas de condições
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing object VV_T681F_VA)
2. If table 830 does not exist on the Choose Activity dialog box, double-click Create condition tables, and go to the next step. If table 830 does exist, double-click Change condition tables.
3. In the Table field, enter 830, and choose Enter.
4. In the Field Catlg column, locate Sales Organization and double-click it. The field is copied to the Selected fields column.
5. Choose Generate.
6. Choose Save. Do not perform any other steps in this task.
3.4.2 Defining Access Sequences
Use
This activity defines access sequences. The access sequence is a search strategy which the SAP System uses to search for condition records valid for a condition type. For example, you can define for a price that the SAP System first searches for a customer-specific price and then for a price list price.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define Access Sequences
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir seqüências de acesso
Transaction Code SM34 (with Customizing object VVC_T682_VA)
2. Double-click Maintain Access Sequences. Accept the warning dialog box.
3. Choose New Entries.
4. Enter the following data:
Field Name Description User action and values Notes
AcSq YB20
Description Sales Organization
5. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.4.3 Condition Types
Use
© SAP AGPage 31 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
This activity will define condition types. Price elements are represented in the SAP system by condition types. Price elements can be, for example, prices, surcharges, discounts, taxes or, freight, and are stored in the system in condition records. You can, for example, define whether a discount is calculated as a percentage or a fixed amount using the condition type. You specify an access sequence in every condition type. Thus, you define which fields the SAP system checks when searching for a valid condition record.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define Condition Types
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir tipos de condição
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object VV_T685A_VA)
2. On the Choose Activity dialog box, double-click Maintain Condition Types.
3. On the Change View “Conditions: Condition Types”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4. Enter the following data:
Field Name Description User action and values Notes
Condit.Type YB30 100% discount
Access Seq YB20
Cond.class A
Calculat.type A
Plus/Minus X
Manual entries D
Item condition Checked
Amount/percent Checked
Delete Checked
Delete fr. DB Do not delete (Set the deletion flag only)
Scale Basis B
5. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.4.4 Defining and Assigning Pricing Procedure
UseIn this activity, you define the pricing procedure used.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define and Assign Pricing Procedures
© SAP AGPage 32 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
IMG Menu Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir e atribuir esquemas de cálculo
Transaction Code SPRO
2. In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Maintain Pricing Procedures.
3. On the Change View “Procedures”: Overview screen, select the entry for procedure RVAA01 and choose Copy As…
4. Overwrite the procedure name with YBAA01 and choose Enter.
5. In the dialog box, choose copy all.
6. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.4.5 Defining Pricing Procedure Determination
UseIn this activity, you define how the pricing procedure is determined.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define and Assign Pricing Procedures
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir e atribuir esquemas de cálculo
Transaction Code OVKK
2. In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Define Pricing Procedure Determination.
3. On the Change View “Pricing Procedures: Determination in Sales Docs.”: Overview screen, make the following entries:
Sales Org.
DChl Division DoPr CuPP PriPr. CTyp
1000 10 10 A 1 YBA001 PR00
1000 10 10 A 2 YBA001 PR00
1100 10 10 B 1 YBA001 PR00
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.4.6 Defining Document Pricing Procedure
UseIn this activity, you define the document pricing procedure Z (credit memo).
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define and Assign Pricing Procedures
© SAP AGPage 33 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir e atribuir esquemas de cálculo
Transaction Code SPRO / SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVKV)
2. In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Define Document Pricing Procedure.
3. On the Change View “Pricing Procedures: Transaction.”: Overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries:
Document Pricing Procedure Description
Y Credit memo
M Consignment Issue
S Services
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.5 Account Determination
3.5.1 Materials: Account Assignment Group
UseThis activity defines account determination dependencies for materials.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment Costing Revenue Account Determination Check Master Data Relevant for Account Assignment
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Class.contábil/cálculo de custos Determinação da conta de receita Verificar dados mestre relevantes para classificação contábil
Transaction Code SPRO / OVK5
2. Double-click Materials: Account Assignment Groups.
3. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
Account Assignment Group Description
03 Finished Products
Y1 Service Provider
Y2 Returnable Goods
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.5.2 Customers: Account Assignment Group
UseThis activity defines account determination dependencies for customers.
© SAP AGPage 34 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment Costing Revenue Account Determination Check Master Data Relevant for Account Assignment
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Class.contábil/cálculo de custos Determinação da conta de receita Verificar dados mestre relevantes para classificação contábil
Transaction Code OVK8
2. Double-click: Customers Account Assignment Groups.
3. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
Account Assignment Group Description
04 Dom.Rev. without CO
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.5.3 Defining Account Determination Procedure
UseThis activity will define your account determination procedures and allocate them to the billing types.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment Costing Revenue Account Determination Define and Assign Account Determination Procedure
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Class.contábil/cálculo de custos Determinação da conta de receita Definir e atribuir esquemas de determinação de contas
Transaction Code SM34 (Customizing Object VVC_T683_XX_VC)
2. Double-click Define Account Determination Procedure.
3. Select the row KOFI00 Account Determination and then double-click Control Data.
4. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
Step Cntr CTyp Requiremt
10 1 KOFI
10 2 KOFK 2
5. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.5.4 Default Values for Account Group for Customer Creation
Use
© SAP AGPage 35 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
This activity will assign default values for account group for a returns customer creation.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Materials Management Purchasing Vendor Master Default values for account group for customer creation
Menu IMG Administração de materiais Compras Mestre fornecedores Valores propostos para grupo de contas para criação cliente
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_T077K_W)
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Make the following entries:
Group Default for Cust.Acct.Group
KRED 0003
4. Choose Save.
3.5.5 Defining Account Keys
UseYou define your account keys in this menu option and allocate them to the condition types in the pricing procedures.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment/Costing Revenue Account Determination Define and Assign Account Keys
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Class.contábil/cálculo de custos Determinação da conta de receita Definir e atribuir chave de conta
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object VV_T687_V1)
2. Double-click Define Account Key.
3. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
Account Key Name
YB1 ERS material rel.
YB2 ERS customer rel.
YB3 provision f. freight
YBS Customer discounts
YCF Cofins Provision
YPS PIS Provision
ZDV Returns
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
© SAP AGPage 36 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.6 Assigning G/L Accounts
UseThis activity will allocate G/L accounts for revenue account determination. You have to make the allocation for every access sequence you have defined beforehand.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment/Costing Revenue Account Determination Assign G/L Accounts
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Class.contábil/cálculo de custos Determinação da conta de receita Atribuir contas do Razão
Transaction Code VKOA
2. On the Assign G/L Accounts screen, double-click Table 1.
3. On the Change View “Cust Grp/MaterialGrp/AcctKey”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4. Maintain the following data:
App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. AAG AAG ActKy G/L acct Provision acc.
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 01 ERS 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 01 ZDV 0000321000 0000321000
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 02 ERL 0000312000
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 02 ERS 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 02 ZDV 0000321000 0000321000
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 03 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 Y1 BRI 0000323200
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 Y1 ERL 0000312000
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 Y1 ERS 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 Y1 WK3 0000323200
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 Y1 YG1 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 01 ZDV 0000321000 0000321000
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 02 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 02 ZDV 0000321000 0000321000
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 03 ERL 0000313000
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 Y1 BRI 0000323200
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 Y1 ERL 0000313000
© SAP AGPage 37 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. AAG AAG ActKy G/L acct Provision acc.
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 Y1 ERS 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 Y1 WK3 0000323200
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 Y1 YG1 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 01 ZDV 0000321000 0000321000
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 02 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 02 ZDV 0000321000 0000321000
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 03 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 Y1 ERL 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1000 01 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1000 01 02 ERL 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1000 01 03 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1000 01 Y1 BRI 0000323200
V KOFK 0050 1000 01 Y1 ERL 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1000 01 Y1 ERS 0000431101
V KOFK 0050 1000 01 Y1 WK3 0000323200
V KOFK 0050 1000 01 Y1 YG1 0000431101
V KOFK 0050 1000 02 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1000 02 02 ERL 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1000 02 03 ERL 0000313000
V KOFK 0050 1000 02 Y1 BRI 0000323200
V KOFK 0050 1000 02 Y1 ERL 0000313000
V KOFK 0050 1000 02 Y1 ERS 0000431101
V KOFK 0050 1000 02 Y1 WK3 0000323200
V KOFK 0050 1000 02 Y1 YG1 0000431101
V KOFK 0050 1000 03 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1000 03 02 ERL 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1000 03 03 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1000 03 Y1 ERL 0000312000
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 01 ERS 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 01 ZDV 0000321000 0000321000
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 02 ERL 0000312000
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 02 ERS 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 02 ZDV 0000321000 0000321000
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 03 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 Y1 BRI 0000323200
© SAP AGPage 38 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. AAG AAG ActKy G/L acct Provision acc.
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 Y1 ERL 0000312000
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 Y1 ERS 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 Y1 WK3 0000323200
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 Y1 YG1 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 01 ZDV 0000321000 0000321000
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 02 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 02 ZDV 0000321000 0000321000
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 03 ERL 0000313000
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 Y1 BRI 0000323200
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 Y1 ERL 0000313000
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 Y1 ERS 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 Y1 WK3 0000323200
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 Y1 YG1 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1010 03 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1010 03 01 ZDV 0000321000 0000321000
V KOFI 0050 1010 03 02 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1010 03 02 ZDV 0000321000 0000321000
V KOFI 0050 1010 03 03 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1010 03 Y1 ERL 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1010 01 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1010 01 02 ERL 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1010 01 03 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1010 01 Y1 BRI 0000323200
V KOFK 0050 1010 01 Y1 ERL 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1010 01 Y1 ERS 0000431101
V KOFK 0050 1010 01 Y1 WK3 0000323200
V KOFK 0050 1010 01 Y1 YG1 0000431101
V KOFK 0050 1010 02 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1010 02 02 ERL 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1010 02 03 ERL 0000313000
V KOFK 0050 1010 02 Y1 BRI 0000323200
V KOFK 0050 1010 02 Y1 ERL 0000313000
V KOFK 0050 1010 02 Y1 ERS 0000431101
V KOFK 0050 1010 02 Y1 WK3 0000323200
V KOFK 0050 1010 02 Y1 YG1 0000431101
V KOFK 0050 1010 03 01 ERL 0000311000
© SAP AGPage 39 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. AAG AAG ActKy G/L acct Provision acc.
V KOFK 0050 1010 03 02 ERL 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1010 03 03 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1010 03 Y1 ERL 0000312000
5. Choose Save and then choose Back.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for Table 2 with the following data:
App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. AAG ActKy G/L acct Provision acc.
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 ERS 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 ERS 0000431101
V KOFK 0050 1000 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1000 01 ERS 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1000 02 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1000 02 ERS 0000312000
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 ERS 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 ERS 0000431101
V KOFK 0050 1010 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1010 01 ERS 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1010 02 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1010 02 ERS 0000312000
7. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for Table 3 with the following data:
App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. AAG ActKy G/L acct Provision acc.
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 ERS 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 YG1 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 ERL 0000312000
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 ERS 0000431101
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 YG1 0000431101
V KOFK 0050 1000 01 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1000 01 ERS 0000312000
V KOFK 0050 1000 02 ERL 0000311000
V KOFK 0050 1000 02 ERS 0000312000
8. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for Table 4 with the following data:
© SAP AGPage 40 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. G/L acct Provision acc.
V KOFI 0050 1000 0000323200
9. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for Table 5 with the following data:
App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. ActKy G/L acct Provision acc.
V KOFI 0050 1000 BRI 323100
V KOFI 0050 1000 BRJ 323000
V KOFI 0050 1000 COF 213400 323400
V KOFI 0050 1000 ERB 512300 215600
V KOFI 0050 1000 ERL 312000
V KOFI 0050 1000 ERS 431101
V KOFI 0050 1000 ERU 512300 215600
V KOFI 0050 1000 ISS 115700
V KOFI 0050 1000 MW1 213100
V KOFI 0050 1000 MW2 213000
V KOFI 0050 1000 MW3 213000
V KOFI 0050 1000 MW4 213200
V KOFI 0050 1000 PIS 213300 323300
V KOFI 0050 1000 WK3 323200
V KOFI 0050 1000 YCF 213400 323400
V KOFI 0050 1000 YPS 213300 323300
V KOFI 0050 1000 ZDV 321000 321000
V KOFI 0050 1000 COF 213400 323400
V KOFI 0050 1000 PIS 213300 323300
V KOFK 0050 1000 BRI 323100
V KOFK 0050 1000 COF 213400 323400
V KOFK 0050 1000 ERL 311000
V KOFK 0050 1000 ERS 431101
V KOFK 0050 1000 ISS 115700
V KOFK 0050 1000 MW1 213100
V KOFK 0050 1000 MW2 213000
V KOFK 0050 1000 MW3 213000
V KOFK 0050 1000 MW4 213200
V KOFK 0050 1000 PIS 213300 323300
V KOFK 0050 1000 WK3 323200
V KOFK 0050 1000 YCF 213400 323400
V KOFK 0050 1000 YPS 213300 323300
V KOFK 0050 1000 COF 213400 323400
V KOFK 0050 1000 PIS 213300 323300
© SAP AGPage 41 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. ActKy G/L acct Provision acc.
V KOFI 0050 1010 BRI 323100
V KOFI 0050 1010 BRJ 323000
V KOFI 0050 1010 COF 213400 323400
V KOFI 0050 1010 ERB 512300 215600
V KOFI 0050 1010 ERL 312000
V KOFI 0050 1010 ERS 431101
V KOFI 0050 1010 ERU 512300 215600
V KOFI 0050 1010 ISS 115700
V KOFI 0050 1010 MW1 213100
V KOFI 0050 1010 MW2 213000
V KOFI 0050 1010 MW3 213000
V KOFI 0050 1010 MW4 213200
V KOFI 0050 1010 PIS 213300 323300
V KOFI 0050 1010 WK3 323200
V KOFI 0050 1010 YCF 213400 323400
V KOFI 0050 1010 YPS 213300 323300
V KOFI 0050 1010 ZDV 321000 321000
V KOFI 0050 1010 COF 213400 323400
V KOFI 0050 1010 PIS 213300 323300
V KOFK 0050 1010 BRI 323100
V KOFK 0050 1010 COF 213400 323400
V KOFK 0050 1010 ERL 311000
V KOFK 0050 1010 ERS 431101
V KOFK 0050 1010 ISS 115700
V KOFK 0050 1010 MW1 213100
V KOFK 0050 1010 MW2 213000
V KOFK 0050 1010 MW3 213000
V KOFK 0050 1010 MW4 213200
V KOFK 0050 1010 PIS 213300 323300
V KOFK 0050 1010 WK3 323200
V KOFK 0050 1010 YCF 213400 323400
V KOFK 0050 1010 YPS 213300 323300
V KOFK 0050 1010 COF 213400 323400
V KOFK 0050 1010 PIS 213300 323300
10. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for Table 6 with the following data:
© SAP AGPage 42 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. AGG AGG ActKy ItCat G/L acct Provision acc.
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 01 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 01 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 02 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 02 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 03 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 03 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 Y1 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1000 01 Y1 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 01 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 01 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 02 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 02 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 03 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 03 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 Y1 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1000 02 Y1 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 01 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 01 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 02 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 02 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 03 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1000 03 03 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 01 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 01 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 02 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 02 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 03 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 03 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 Y1 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1010 01 Y1 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 01 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 01 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 02 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 02 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 03 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 03 ERL YGRA 214901
© SAP AGPage 43 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. AGG AGG ActKy ItCat G/L acct Provision acc.
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 Y1 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1010 02 Y1 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1010 03 01 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1010 03 01 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1010 03 02 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1010 03 02 ERL YGRA 214901
V KOFI 0050 1010 03 03 ERL KBNB 115700
V KOFI 0050 1010 03 03 ERL YGRA 214901
11. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.6.1 Cash Account Determination
UseThis activity will define Assing G/L Account.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment/Costing Cash Account Determination Assign G/L Accounts
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Class.contábil/cálculo de custos Determinação da conta de caixa Atribuir contas do Razão
Transaction Code OV77
2. On the Assign G/L Accounts screen, double-click Table 3 (502).
3. On the change view “Sales org./Item cat.”: Overview scren, choose new entries:
App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. ItCat G/L acct Provision acc.
VC CASH 0050 1000 KBNB 115700
VC CASH 0050 1000 YGRA 214901
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.7 Availability Check
3.7.1 Availability Check: Define Checking Groups
UseThis activity will define checking groups with which you specify the type of requirements records that the system will create when processing sales orders or deliveries. Sales order requirements and delivery requirements can be controlled separately.
© SAP AGPage 44 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
5. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check With ATP Logic or Against Planning Define Checking Groups
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Verificação de disponibilidades e transferência necessidades Verificação de disponibilidade Verif.disponibilidade seg.lógica ATP em relação plan.prel. Definir grupos de controle
Transaction Code OVZ2
6. Choose New Entries.
7. Enter the following data:
Av Description TotalSales TotDlvReqs Accum Response
01 Daily requirements B B 3
02 Individ. Requirements A A 3
Y2 Individ.requirements A A 3
8. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.7.2 Defining Material Block for Other Users
UseIn this IMG activity you define for each checking group and initiator whether the material master record should be blocked for other orders during the availability check. If it is blocked, you cannot create two orders for the same material at the same time.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check With ATP Logic or Against Planning Define Material Block for Others Users
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Verificação de disponibilidades e transferência necessidades Verificação de disponibilidade Verif.disponibilidade seg.lógica ATP em relação plan.prel. Determinar bloqueio de material para outros usuários
Transaction Code SM30 (V_TMVFP)
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Enter the following data:
Av Description Initiator Block
Y2 Individ.requirements A X
Y2 Individ.requirements B X
© SAP AGPage 45 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Y2 Individ.requirements C
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.7.3 Availability Check: Defining Checking Groups Default Value
UseThis activity will define the checking group that the system proposes when you create a new material master record. You can overwrite the default value for the checking group in the material master record.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check With ATP Logic or Against Planning Define Checking Groups Default Value
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Verificação de disponibilidades e transferência necessidades Verificação de disponibilidade Verif.disponibilidade seg.lógica ATP em relação plan.prel. Determinar bloqueio de material para outros usuários
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TMVFU)
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Enter the following data:
Material Type Plant Availability Check
FERT 1000 Y2
FERT 1100 Y2
HAWA 1000 Y2
HAWA 1100 Y2
LEIH 1000 Y2
LEIH 1100 Y2
VERP 1000 Y2
VERP 1100 Y2
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.7.4 Carrying Out Control for Availability Check
UseThis activity will define checking rules for the availability check and allocate them to a checking group.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
© SAP AGPage 46 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check With ATP Logic or Against Planning Carry out Control For Availability Check
Menu IMG Funções básicas Verificação de disponibilidades e transferência necessidades Verificação de disponibilidade Verif.disponibilidade seg.lógica ATP em relação plan.prel. Executar controle da verificação de disponibilidades
Transaction Code OVZ9
2. Copy the following checking rules (CRl) from checking group (avail) 01 to checking group Y2:
Avail CRl
Y2 01
Y2 03
Y2 A
Y2 AE
Y2 AQ
Y2 AV
Y2 AW
Y2 B
Y2 BE
Y2 BQ
Y2 BV
Y2 BW
Y2 PM
Y2 PP
Y2 PS
Y2 RP
Y2 RS
Y2 YO
Y2 YP
3. Choose Save
4. Choose New Entries.
3.7.5 Availability Check against Product Allocation: Maintaining Procedure
UseThis activity defines the product allocation determination procedure for the availability check against product allocations.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
© SAP AGPage 47 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check Against Product Allocation Maintain Procedure
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Verificação de disponibilidades e transferência necessidades Verificação de disponibilidade Verificação de disponibilidade em relação a contingentes Atualizar esquema
Transaction Code OV1Z
2. On the Change View “Product Allocation: Definition of Procedure”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following data:
Field Name Description User action and values Notes
Product Allocation 001
Description Prod. Alloc. Scheme
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.7.6 Availability Check against Product Allocation: Defining Object
UseThis activity will define the product allocation object. This product allocation object is the object in the product allocation determination procedure. This is because product allocations are stored in the planning hierarchy by object.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check Against Product Allocation Define Object
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Verificação de disponibilidades e transferência necessidades Verificação de disponibilidade Verificação de disponibilidade em relação a contingentes Definir objeto
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_T190O)
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Enter the following data:
Field Name Description User action and values Notes
Object 001
Description SD Prod. Alloc.
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
© SAP AGPage 48 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.7.7 Availability Check against Product Allocation: Specifying Hierarchy
UseThis activity assigns an info structure to each of the product allocation determination procedures. You can display the suitable statistical structures.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check Against Product Allocation Specify Hierarchy
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Verificação de disponibilidades e transferência necessidades Verificação de disponibilidade Verificação de disponibilidade em relação a contingentes Determinar hierarquia
Transaction Code OV3Z
2. On the Change View “SD Product Allocation Planning Structure”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following data:
Field Name Description User action and values Notes
Procedure 001 Prod. Alloc. Scheme
Step
Step Name Prod. Alloc. Steps
Info Struct. S140
Mask $
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.7.8 Availability Check against Product Allocation: Defining Consumption Periods
UseWhen you have defined a product allocation determination procedure, you can also define (past and future) consumption periods for product allocation quantities.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check Against Product Allocation Define Consumption Periods
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Verificação de disponibilidades e transferência necessidades Verificação de disponibilidade Verificação de disponibilidade em relação a contingentes Definir intervalos de compensação
© SAP AGPage 49 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_T190V)
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Enter the following data:
Field Name Description User action and values Notes
Info structure S140
Bwd cons 3
Fwd cons 2
Period M
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.7.9 Availability Check against Product Allocation: Controlling Product Allocation
UseThis activity will assign one or several objects with different validity periods to the product allocation determination procedures. The validity periods cannot overlap.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check Against Product Allocation Control Product Allocation
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Verificação de disponibilidades e transferência necessidades Verificação de disponibilidade Verificação de disponibilidade em relação a contingentes Controle da alocação de produtos
Transaction Code OV4Z
2. On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, in Product Allocation, enter 001 then choose Continue.
3. Choose New Entries.
4. Enter the following data:
Field Name Description User action and values Notes
Step 0
Info structure S140
Object 001 SD Prod. Alloc
Valid to 12/31/2999
Active Checked
Conversion factor 1.000
5. Choose Save and then choose Back.
© SAP AGPage 50 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.7.10 Defining Flow According to Requirement Category
UseThis activity will determine whether the system should run an availability check for product allocations or not. You can determine this in each requirements class.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check Against Product Allocation Define Flow According to Requirement Category
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Verificação de disponibilidades e transferência necessidades Verificação de disponibilidade Verificação de disponibilidade em relação a contingentes Definir processo por ctg.necessidade
Transaction Code OVZ0
2. On the Change View “Availability and Transfer of Requirements by Req. Type”: Overview screen, maintain the following entries:
ReqCl AvC Rq All.
011 X X X
030 X X X
031 X X X
041 X X X
3. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.8 Output Control
3.8.1 Maintaining Output Procedure
UseThis activity defines output determination for documents.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Output Control Output Determination Output Determination Using the Condition Technique Maintain Output Determination for Billing Documents Maintain Output Determination Procedure
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Controle de mensagens Determinação de mensagens Determinação de mensagem via técnica de condições Atualizar determinação de mensagens para docs. faturamento Atualizar esquema de mensagens
Transaction Code SM34 (Customizing Object VVC_T683_XX_V3)
© SAP AGPage 51 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
2. Choose New Entries.
3. In the Procedure column, enter V10000, and in the Description column, enter Billing Output.
4. Choose Save.
5. Select the row you just created, and double-click Control Data.
6. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
Step Cntr CTyp Description Requiremt Manual only
010 01 RD00 Invoice 0
7. Choose Save and then choose Back twice.
3.9 Output Control – Sales Documents
3.9.1 Maintaining Output Types: Output Types
UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain output types.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Output Control Output Determination Output Determination Using the Condition Technique Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents Maintain Output Types
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Controle de mensagens Determinação de mensagens Determinação de mensagem via técnica de condições Atualizar determinação de mensagens para docs. faturamento Atualizar tipos de mensagem
Transaction Code V/30
2. On the Display View” Output Types”: Overview screen, select Entry and choose Mail Title and Texts.
Language Key Appln
Output Type Document title
PT V1 AF00 Tipo acesso p/parâmetros de impressão e proposta
PT V1 AN00 Acesso para parâmetros de impressão e proposta
PT V1 BA00 Tipo de acesso p/parâmetros impressão e proposta
3. On the overview screen, double-Click Output types AF00, AN00 and BA00 and enter the following values:
Partial Output 1 from 2 of the table V_T685B:
Usage Application Output type Access
sequence
Name PrntParamtr criteria
B V1 AF00 0003 Inquiry 1
© SAP AGPage 52 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Usage Application Output type Access
sequence
Name PrntParamtr criteria
B V1 AN00 0002 Quotation 1
B V1 BA00 0004 Order Confirmation
1
Partial Output 2 from 2 of the table V_T685B:
Dispatch time1
Access
To
conditions
Storage
Mode
Document
type
Transmission
Medium
Partner Function
1 X 1 1 SP
1 X 1 SDOQUOTAT 1 SP
1 X 1 SDOORDER SP
4. Choose Save.
Result The output types are created.
3.9.2 Maintaining Output Types: Message Types
UseThe purpose of this activity is to create message type.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Output Control Output Determination Output Determination Using the Condition Technique Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents Maintain Output Types
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object VN_TNAPN)
2. Select OutputType and choose Partner functions from the Dialog Structure.
3. Maintain the following values (Output Table VN_TNAPN):
Application Output Type Transmission Medium
Partner Function
V1 AF00 1 SP
V1 AF00 2 SP
V1 AN00 1 SP
V1 AN00 2 SP
V1 AN00 6 SP
V1 BA00 1 SP
V1 BA00 2 SP
V1 BA00 6 SP
V1 BA00 A SP
© SAP AGPage 53 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
4. Choose Save.
Result The message types are created.
3.10 Output Control – Shipping
3.10.1 Maintaining Output Types
UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain output types.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Output Control Output Determination Maintain Output Determination for Outbound Deliveries Maintain Output Types
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Bases Controle de mensagens Determinação de mensagens Atualizar determinação de mensagens para entregas Atualizar tipos de mensagem
Transaction Code V/34
2. On the Display View” Output Types”: Overview screen, select Entry and choose Mail Title and Texts.
3. Enter the following values. Output Table V_TNATI:
Language Key
Appln Output Type Document title
EN V2 LD00 Access Type for Print Parameter and Proposal
PT V2 YBL1 Tipo de acesso p/parâmetros impressão e proposta
4. Choose Save.
5. On the Display View” Output Types”: Overview screen, enter the following values. Partial Output 1 from 2 of the table V_T685B:
Usage Application Output type Access
sequence
Name PrntParamtr criteria
B V2 LD00 0012 Delivery Note 5
B V2 YBL1 0012 Bill of Lading 5
Partial Output 2 from 2 of the table V_T685B:
Dispatch time1
Access
To
conditions
Storage
Mode
Document
type
Transmission Medium
Partner Function
3 X 1 SDODELNOTE 1 SH
3 X 1 SDODELNOTE 1 SH
6. Choose Save.
© SAP AGPage 54 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Result The output types are created.
3.10.2 Assigning Output Determination Procedures
UseThe purpose of this activity is to assign output determination procedures.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Output Control Output Determination Maintain Output Determination for Outbound Deliveries Assign Output Determination Procedures
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Expedição Bases Controle de mensagens Determinação de mensagens Atualizar determinação de mensagens para entregas Atribuir esquema de mensagem
Transaction Code V/71
2. In the Choose Activity dialog box, select Assign deliveries (header) and choose Enter.
3. On the Change View” Delivery Types –Output Determination Procedure”: Overview screen, enter the following values. Output Table V_TVAK_NAC:
Sales Document Type
Appln Output determ.proc. Output Type
LF V2 V10000 YBL1
LR V2 V10000 YBL1
4. Choose Save.
Result The output determination procedures are assigned.
3.10.3 Maintaining Output Types - Partner Function
UseThe purpose of this activity is to create message type.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Output Control Output Determination Maintain Output Determination for Outbound Deliveries Maintain Output Types
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Bases Controle de mensagens Determinação de mensagens Atualizar determinação de mensagens para entregas Atualizar tipos de mensagem
© SAP AGPage 55 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Transaction Code V/34
2. On the Change View “Output Types”: Overview screen, choose the OutputType and double-click Partner Functions from the Dialog Structure.
3. Enter the following values. Output Table VN_TNAPN:
Application Output Type Transmission
Medium
Partner Function
V2 YBL1 1 SH
V2 YBL1 2 SH
4. Choose Save.
Result The message types are created.
3.11 Output Control – Billing
3.11.1 Maintaining Output Types
UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain output types.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Billing Intercompany Billing Automatic Posting to Vendor Account (SAP-EDI)
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Faturamento Faturamento interno Lançamento automático na parte do fornecedor via SAP-EDI
Transaction Code V/40
2. Choose Activity Maintain output types
3. On the Display View” Output Types”: Overview screen, select Entry and choose Mail Title and Texts.
4. Enter the following values. Output Table V_TNATI:
Language Key
Appln Output Type Document title
PT V3 RD00 Tipo de acesso p/parâmetros impressão e proposta
5. Choose Save.
6. Enter the following values. Partial Output 1 from 2 of the table V_T685B:
Usage Application Output type Access
sequence
Name PrntParamtr criteria
B V3 RD00 0002 Invoice 1
Partial Output 2 from 2 of the table V_T685B:
© SAP AGPage 56 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Dispatch time1
Access
To
conditions
Storage
Mode
Document
type
Transmission
Medium
Partner Function
1 X 1 SDOINVOICE 1 BP
7. Choose Save.
Result The output types are created.
3.11.2 Assigning Output Determination Procedures
UseThis activity defines output determination procedures for documents.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Define Billing Types
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Definir tipo de documento de faturamento
Transaction Code VOFA
2. On the Choose Activity screen select Define Billing Types.
3. Choose the relevant billing type and make the following entries:
Billing Type Output determ.proc. Application Output Type
F1 V10000 V3 RD00
F2 V10000 V3 RD00
FAZ V10000 V3 RD00
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.11.3 SD Output Determination - Billing Partner Functions
UseThe purpose of this activity is to create message types.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Output Control Output Determination Output Determination Using the Condition Technique Maintain Output Determination for Billing Documents Assign Output Types to Partner Functions
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Dados mestre Funções básicas Determinação de mensagens Determinação de mensagem via técnica de condições Atualizar determinação de
© SAP AGPage 57 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
mensagens para docs.faturamento Atribuir mensagens às funções do parceiro
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object VV_TNAPN_V3)
2. On the Change View: Output Control: Output By Partner Function: Overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries:
Application Output Type Transmission Medium
Partner Function
V3 RD00 1 SH
V3 RD00 2 SH
V3 RD00 6 SH
V3 RD00 A SH
3. Choose Save.
ResultThe message types are created.
3.12 Defining Print Parameters
3.12.1 Defining Print Parameters Sales Organization
UseIn this step, you define the print parameters for sales, shipping, billing, transportation and sales activity output, for example. This is dependent on a predefined key.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Output Control Define Print Parameters
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Controle de mensagens Definir parâmetros de impressão
Transaction Code VP01
2. On the Print Parameters screen, locate and double-click Inquiry (AF00).
3. Choose New Entries and maintain the following data:
SOrg Output Device Name Suffix 1
Suffix 2 Immediate Release
1000 LP01 (or LOCL or other printer)
LIST1S AF00 SOLICITAÇÃO Checked
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the following data:
CTyp SOrg. Output Device Name Suffix 1
Suffix 2 ImmediateRelease
AN00 1000 LP01 (or LOCL or other printer)
LIST1S AN00 COTAÇÃO X
© SAP AGPage 58 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
CTyp SOrg. Output Device Name Suffix 1
Suffix 2 ImmediateRelease
BA00 1000 LP01 (or LOCL or other printer)
LIST1S BA00 CONFIRMAÇÃO X
KO00 1000 LP01 (or LOCL or other printer)
LIST1S KO00 CONTRATO X
LP00 1000 LP01 (or LOCL or other printer)
LIST1S LP00 PROGRAMA DE X
RD00 1000 LP01 (or LOCL or other printer)
LIST1S LT01 FATURA X
RD03 1000 LP01 (or LOCL or other printer)
LIST1S AF00 VENDA À VIST
RDES 1000 LP01 (or LOCL or other printer)
LIST1S LT01 FATURA NDR
3.12.2 Defining Print Parameters Shipping
UseIn this step, you set the output parameters. The condition types set for the output determination, which the system can find automatically, appear under the category Shipping. Per condition type, you specify - depending on which output location in the condition type is set as a print parameter - one or several locations and determine an output device as well as some parameters for the printout per condition type and position.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Output Control Define print parameters shipping
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Bases Controle de mensagens Definir parâmetros impressão expedição
Transaction Code VP01SHP
2. On the Print Parameters screen, locate and double-click Delivery Note (LD00).
3. Choose New Entries and maintain the following data:
Ship Point
Output Device Name Suffix 1
Suffix 2
Immediate Release
1000 LP01 (or LOCL or other printer)
LIST1S LD00 LIEFER X
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.13 Output Control – Picking SD
3.13.1 Output Determination for Picking List
UseThis activity will define the settings for SD picking without Lean WM.
© SAP AGPage 59 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
For further details regarding the output customizing for SD picking (w/o lean WM) refer to OSS note 145136.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity use the following navigation:
Transaction Code OVLT
2. Make the following entries (for shipping point 1000, 100R, 1100 and 110R) on the Change View “Organizational Unit: Shipping Pts. – Print Picking Lst”: Overview screen.
Field Name User action and values Note
Out. EK00
Lng PT
No. 1
Time 3
Med 1
3. Save your entries.
4. Choose Back (F3).
ResultOutput determination for SD picking has been set up.
3.13.2 Maintaining Print Parameter for SD Picking
UseThis activity will define print parameters for SD picking without Lean WM.
For further details regarding the output customizing for SD picking (w/o lean WM) refer to OSS note 145136.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity use the following navigation:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Output Control Define print parameters shipping
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Bases Controle de mensagens Definir parâmetros impressão expedição
Transaction Code VP01SHP
2. On the Print Parameters View choose Shipping /Spec.Case((V4).
3. On the Print Parameters View double-click Picking List (EK00).
4. On the Change View “Print Parameters for Shipping Point”: Overview screen, choose New entries.
5. Make the following entries:
Field Name User action and values Note
Shipping Point 1000
© SAP AGPage 60 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Field Name User action and values Note
OutputDevice LP01 Select suitable device
Name LIST1S
Suffix1 EK00
Suffix2 LISTA PICKIN
Print immed. Selected
6. Save your entries.
7. Repeat step 4 and 5 for shipping point 100R, 1100 and 110R.
8. Choose Back (F3).
ResultThe print parameters for SD picking have been set up.
3.14 Product Specific Settings
3.14.1 Maintaining Procedure Determination in Background for Product Proposal
UseThis activity will determine the product proposal procedure for background processing.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Dynamic Product Proposal Maintain Procedure Determination (in Background) for Product Proposal
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Proposta de produto dinâmica Atualizar determinação de esquemas (background) p/proposta de produto
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TPVSB)
2. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
SOrg. DChl Dv PPCustProc PPPr
1000 01 01 A A00001
3. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.14.2 Maintaining Procedure Determination Online for Product Proposal
UseThis activity will determine the product proposal procedure for background processing.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
© SAP AGPage 61 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Dynamic Product Proposal Maintain Procedure Determination (Online) for Product Proposal
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Proposta de produto dinâmica Atualizar determinação de esquemas (on-line) p/proposta de produto
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TPVSO)
2. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
SOrg. DChl Dv SOff. SGrp PPCustProc PPDoPr PPPr
1000 10 10 100 100 A A A00001
3. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.14.3 Assigning Document Procedure to Sales Document Type
UseThis activity will assign the document determination procedure for the product proposal to the individual sales document types.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Dynamic Product Proposal Assign Document Procedure for Product Proposal to Sales Document Type
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Proposta de produto dinâmica Atribuir esq.documentos p/prop.prod. aos tipos de documentos de vendas
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVAK_PV)
2. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
SaTy Description PP DocProc
QT Quotation A
SO Rush Order A
OR Standard Order A
3. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.15 Defining Item Category Groups
UseUsing the item category group, you group together different material types for item category determination from the SD view. For every material type, you can define a default item category group which is proposed by the SAP System when you create a material master record.
Procedure
© SAP AGPage 62 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Carry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Item Define Item Category Groups
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Item do documento de vendas Definir categorias de item
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TPTM)
2. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
ItCGr Description
YB01 Credit memo
YB02 Ret. Pack. Delivery
YB03 Returnable packaging
YB09 Standard w/o batch
YBKF Header config.
YBKP Component
YBER Service w/SD-order
YBLE Service w/o Delivery
YBEN Service w/o Project
YBEP Service w/ project
YBOR Stock ord 3rd party (w. SN)
YBNA Stock ord 3rd party (w/o SN)
YBUK Bought-In
3. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.16 Determining Active Receivables per Item Category
UseThis activity will activate the credit management functionality by sales item category.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Credit Management/Risk Management Credit Management/Risk Management Settings Determine Active Receivables Per Item Category
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Adm.crédito/riscos Opções preliminares para a adm.crédito/adm.riscos Definir crédito ativo por ctg.item
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVAP_KRE)
© SAP AGPage 63 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
2. On the row with ItCa of TAN, select the Credit active checkbox.
3. Choose Save.
3.17 Changing controllable error messages shipping processing
UseThis activity will change the type for a system message processed during the delivery creation.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity use the following navigation:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping System Modifications Specify Characteristics for System Messages
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Adaptações do sistema Determinar características para mensagens do sistema
Transaction Code OVM1
2. Change message L VU 013 according to the table below on the Change View “Controllable Error Messages Shipping Processing”: Overview screen.
Field Name User action and values Note
Type W
3. Save your entries.
4. Choose Back (F3).
ResultMessage 013 has been changed.
3.18 Sales Order Processing I
3.18.1 Defining Number Ranges for Sales Documents
UseIn this menu option, you define the number intervals of the number ranges for sales documents.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Header Define Number Ranges for Sales Documents
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Cabeçalho de documento de vendas Definir intervalos de numeração para docs.vendas
Transaction Code VN01
2. Choose Change Intervals.
© SAP AGPage 64 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3. Choose Insert Interval, then maintain the following data:
No From number To number Current number Ext
90 R0001 R9999 X
4. Choose Save and then choose Back twice.
3.18.2 Defining Sales Document Types
UseThis activity will define settings for sales document types.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Header Define Sales Document Types
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Cabeçalho de documento de vendas Definir tipos de doc.vendas
Transaction Code VOV8
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Make the following entries:
Sales Document Type YBRE YBFD YGRA
SD document categ. H I I
Number range – internal assignment
13 01 01
Number range – external assignment
14 02 02
Item number increment 000010 000010 000010
Sub-item increment 000010 000010 000010
Reference mandatory M
Check division 2
Check credit limit D
Item division X
Read info record X X X
Output application V1 V1 V1
Screen Sequence Group RE RE AU
Incompl.proced. 14 YG
Transaction Group 0 0 0
Doc.Pric.Procedure A C A
Display Range UALL UALL UALL
FCode for overv. Scr. UER1 UER1 UER1
ProdAttr.messages A
Delivery type LR LF LF
© SAP AGPage 65 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Shipping conditions RE 01
Delivery-related billing type YGRA
Order-rel.bill.type YGRA
Intercomp.bill.type IG YIV
Billing block
CndType line items EK02
Billing plan type
Paymt guarant. proc. 01 01
Paymt card plan type 03 03
Checking group 01 01
Propose Delivery Date X X X
Billing request DR
Subseq.order type SD
4. Choose Save.
5. Choose Back.
3.18.3 Sales Organizations - Assigning Order Type
UseIn this menu option, you define the number intervals of the number ranges for sales documents.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Documents Header Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Cabeçalho de documento de vendas Atribuir área de vendas a tipos de documento de vendas
Transaction Code OVAO
2. In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Combine Sales Organizations.
3. On the Change View: Sales Organizations – Assign Order Type: Overview screen, make the following entries:
Sales Organization Reference Sales Organization
1000 1000
1100 1100
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.18.4 Divisions by Sales Org - Assign Order Type
Use
© SAP AGPage 66 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
In this menu option, you define the number intervals of the number ranges for sales documents.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Documents Header Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Cabeçalho de documento de vendas Atribuir área de vendas a tipos de documento de vendas
Transaction Code OVAN
2. In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Combine Divisions.
3. On the Change View: Divisions by SalesOrg – Assign Order Type”: Overview screen, make the following entries:
Sales Organization Reference Division
1000 10
1000 20
1100 10
1100 20
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.18.5 Distribution by Sales Org - Assign Order Type
UseIn this menu option, you define the number intervals of the number ranges for sales documents.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Documents Header Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Cabeçalho de documento de vendas Atribuir área de vendas a tipos de documento de vendas
Transaction Code OVAM
2. In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Combine Distribution Channels.
3. On the Change View: Distribution by Sales Org – Assign Order Type”: Overview screen, make the following entries:
Sales Organization Reference Distribution Channel
1000 10
1000 20
1000 30
© SAP AGPage 67 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
1100 10
1100 20
1100 30
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.18.6 Assigning Sales Area to Sales Document Types
Use
In this menu option, you allocate the allowed order types to each sales area.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Documents Header Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Cabeçalho de documento de vendas Atribuir área de vendas a tipos de documento de vendas
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVAKZ)
2. In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Assign sales order types permitted for sales areas.
3. On the Change View: Sales Documents. Allowed Order Types per Sales Org.: Overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries:
Reference Sales Organization
Reference Distribution Channel
Reference Division Sales Document Type
1000 10 10 QT
1000 10 10 CR
1000 10 10 DR
1000 10 10 RK
1000 10 10 OR
1000 10 10 IN
1000 10 10 KB
1000 10 10 KE
1000 10 10 KR
1000 10 10 CQ
1100 10 10 QT
1100 10 10 CR
1100 10 10 DR
1100 10 10 RK
1100 10 10 OR
© SAP AGPage 68 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Reference Sales Organization
Reference Distribution Channel
Reference Division Sales Document Type
1100 10 10 IN
1100 10 10 KB
1100 10 10 KE
1100 10 10 KR
1100 10 10 CQ
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.18.7 Assigning Sales Area to Credit Control Area
UseThis activity will assign a sales area to a credit control area.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Enterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign sales area to credit control area
Menu IMG Estrutura do empreendimento Atribuição Vendas e distribuição Atribuir área de vendas à área de controle de crédito
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVTA_KKB)
2. On the Change View “Sales Area: Allocation to Credit Control Area”: Overview screen make the following entries in row CCAr:
SOrg. DChl DV CCAr
1000 10 10 1000
1000 20 10 1000
1000 30 10 1000
1100 10 10 1000
1100 20 10 1000
1100 30 10 1000
3. Choose Save.
3.18.8 Defining Relevant Item Categories
UseThis activity will mark item categories relevant for picking.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Picking Define Relevant Item Categories
© SAP AGPage 69 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Picking Determinar tipos de item relevantes
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVLP_KOM)
2. For the row with the ItCa of TAC, select the Relevant for Picking checkbox.
3. Choose Save.
3.18.9 Defining Incompleteness Procedures
UseThis activity will define Incompleteness Procedures.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Log of Incomplete Items Define Incompleteness Procedures
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Dados incompletos Definir esquemas de dados incompletos
Transaction Code OVA2
2. Select the row with Group H and then double-click Procedures.
3. Choose Display Change.
4. Choose New Entries.
5. Make the following entries:
Field Name Description User action and values Note
InProc Y1
Description Min.delivery item
6. Choose Save.
7. Select the Y1 row and then double-click Fields.
8. Choose New Entries.
9. Make the following entries:
Tables Field name Screen Status Group
V50UC BTREF CHSP_T D8
V50UC OVPIK PIOV_T D8
10. Choose Save.
3.18.10 Assigning Incompleteness Procedures
UseThis activity will assign incompleteness procedures to delivery item categories.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Incompletion Control for Deliveries Assign Incompleteness Procedures
© SAP AGPage 70 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Bases Controle de dados incompletos para fornecimentos Atribuir esquemas de dados incompletos
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVLP_VUV)
2. Double-click Assign incompletion forms to the delivery item types.
3. Choose New Entries.
4. Make the following entries:
Item category Incompletion procedure
DLP Y1
5. Choose Save.
3.18.11 Defining and Assigning Text Determination Procedures
UseThe text types of a text object are grouped together in text determination procedures. You assign a text determination procedure using certain keys, for example, account group customer or sales document type.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Text Control Define and Assign Text Determination Procedures
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Controle de texto Definir e atribuir esquemas de texto
Transaction Code VOTXN
2. In the Text object pane, select Header radio under Delivery and choose Change.
3. In the Dialog Structure pane, double-click Text procedure assignment.
4. In the RL row, make the following entries:
Delivery typ TextDetermProcedure Description
RL 02 Returns (Pur.Ord.)
5. Choose Save.
6. Choose Back twice.
7. In the Text object pane, select Item radio under Delivery and choose Change.
8. In the Dialog Structure pane, double-click Text procedure assignment.
9. In the RLN row, make the following entries:
Item category TextDetermProcedure Description
RLN 02 Returns order
© SAP AGPage 71 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
10. Choose Save.
11. Choose Back twice.
3.18.12 Assigning Material Determination Procedures to Sales Document Types
Use This activity will assign material determination procedures to sales document types.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Material Determination Assign Procedures To Sales Document Types
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação de material Atribuir esquemas aos tipos de doc.vendas
Transaction Code OV14
2. For sales document type OR, enter the material determination procedure A00001.
3. Choose Save.
ResultThe material determination procedure is assigned.
3.19 Down Payment Configuration
3.19.1 Defining Billing Plan Types
UseThis activity will define a billing type for milestone billing.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Plan Define Billing Plan Types
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Faturamento Programa de faturamento Definir tipo de programa de faturamento
Transaction Code OVBO
2. On the Choose Activity screen choose Maintain billing plan types for milestone billing.
3. Choose New Entries.
4. Make the following entries:
Billing Plan Type
Start Date Date Category Online Order FCode-OvervScrn
Y1 01 04 X 0003
5. Choose Save.
© SAP AGPage 72 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.19.2 Date category
UseIn this activity you maintain date categories for the billing plan types.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Plan Define and Assign Date Categories
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Faturamento Programa de faturamento Definir denominações da data
Transaction Code OVBJ
2. On the Choose Activity screen choose Maintain Date Category for Billing Plan Type.
3. Choose New Entries.
4. Make the following entries:
Billing Plan Type
Date Category
Text Date descript.
Text Billing Rule
Fixed Date
Billing Block
Billing Type
Y1 01 Milestone billing
0003 Contract Conclusion
1 02
Y1 02 Closing Invoice
0008 Closing Invoice
3 02
Y1 03 Down payment request (proc.)
0009 Down Payment
4 02 FAZ
Y1 04 Down payment request (amount)
0009 Down payment
5 0 02 FAZ
5. Choose Save.
3.19.3 Defining and Assigning Item Category YBAO
UseThis activity will define and assign item category YBAO
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Item Define Item Categories
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Item do documento de vendas Definir categorias de item
Transaction Code VOV7
© SAP AGPage 73 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Make the following entries:
Item category YBAO Milestone-Bill.Plan
Billing Relevance I
Billing Plan Type Y1
Pricing X
Business item Selected
Sched.Line Allowed Selected
Wght/Vol.Relevant Selected
Determine Cost Selected
Incompletion procedure 20
PartnerDetermProced N
TextDetermProcedure 01
Item Cat.Stats.Group 1
Screen Seq.Grp N
4. Choose Save.
5. Choose Back.
3.20 Defining Item Categories for Deliveries
UseIn this menu option you define your item categories for deliveries.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistic Execution Shipping Deliveries Define Item Categories for Deliveries
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Fornecimentos Definir tipos de item para fornecimentos
Transaction Code 0VLP
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Make the following entries:
Item Category
Doc.Categ. Mat.no.’0’allowed ItemCat.stat.group
YBAO J X 1
Check quantity 0
Check minimum qty
Check overdelivery Relevant for picking
StLocation required
A A A X X
© SAP AGPage 74 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Determine StLoc
Auto Batch Determination
X X
4. Choose Save.
3.21 Assigning Item Categories
UseThis activity will assign item categories to sales documents.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Item Assign Item Categories
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Item do documento de vendas Definir categorias de item
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_T184)
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Make the following entries:
Sales Document Type
Item Category Group
Default Item Category
Manual Item category
Manual Item category
Manual Item category
Manual Item category
Manual Item category
Manual Item category
Manual Item category
TA NORM TAN TAP TAQ TANN TAW DSI TAO YBAO
4. Choose Save.
3.22 Copying Control: Sales Document to Billing Document
UseThis activity will define copying control logic from Sales Document types to Billing Types.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity use the following navigation:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Maintain Copying Control for Billing Documents Copying Control: Sales Document to Billing Document
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Atualizar controle de cópia para docs.faturamento Controle de cópia: doc.vendas doc.faturamento
Transaction Code VTFA
© SAP AGPage 75 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
2. On the Display View Header: Overview screen, choose Display <> Change.
3. Select a combination of target billing type and source sales document type.
4. In the Dialog Structure screen area, double-click Item.
5. Choose New Entries.
6. Make the following entries:
Target Billing Type
Source Sales Doc Type
Item Category
Copying requirements
Data VBRK/VBRP
Billing quantity
Pos./neg. quantity
Pricing type
F2 TSA YBAO 023 000 A + G
F5 AA YBAO 008 000 C G
F5 TA YBAO 008 000 C G
F5 TAV YBAO 008 000 C G
F5 TSA YBAO 008 000 C G
FAZ TA YBAO 020 000 A + G
FAZ TAV YBAO 020 000 A + G
FAZ TSA YBAO 020 000 A + G
F1 AA YBAO 002 001 C + C
F1 TA YBAO 002 001 C + C
F1 TAV YBAO 002 001 C + C
F1 TSA YBAO 002 001 C + C
F2 AA YBAO 002 000 A + G
F2 TA YBAO 023 000 A + K
F2 TAV YBAO 023 000 A + K
7. Choose Save.
8. Choose Back.
3.23 Specifying Copy Controls for Deliveries
UseThis activity will copy controls.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Copying Control Specify Copy Control for Deliveries
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Controle de cópia Determinar controle de cópia para fornecimentos
Transaction Code VTLA
© SAP AGPage 76 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
2. On the Display View Header: Overview screen, choose Display <> Change.
3. Select the required combinations of source sales document type and delivery type. Double-click Item in the Dialog Structure pane.
4. Choose New Entries.
5. Make the following entries:
Sales Doc Type
Delivery Type
ItemCat Order requirements
Item Data
Item Ext. System
Business Data
Update doc flow
+/-
OR JF YBAO 101 101 2 X +
AA LF YBAO 101 101 2 X +
CH LF YBAO 101 101 2 X +
OR LF YBAO 101 101 2 X +
TAV LF YBAO 101 101 2 X +
TSA LF YBAO 101 101 2 X +
6. Choose Save.
7. Choose Back.
Result Controls are copied.
3.24 Determination of requirement types using transaction
UseIn this activity you determine the relation between item category and requirement type.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistic Executions Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Transfer of Requirements Determination of Requirement Types using Transaction
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Bases Transf.necessidades Determinação do tipo de necessidade através da operação
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVEPZ_V)
2. On the Change View “Assignment of Requirement Types to Transaction”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the values shown below.
Field Name Description User action and values Comment
Item category YBAO
MRP Tpye
Reqmts type KE
Source
© SAP AGPage 77 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
4. Save your settings.
5. Choose Back (F3) twice.
3.24.1 Defining Delivery Item Category
Use This activity will define the delivery item category YBAO.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Deliveries Define Item Categories for Deliveries
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Fornecimentos Definir tipos de item para fornecimentos
Transaction Code OVLP
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Make the following entries:
Field Name Description User action and values Comment
Item Category YBAO
Document cat J Delivery
Mat.no.’0’ allowed X
ItemCat.stat.group 1
Check quantity 0 A Note about the situation
Check minimum qty A Note about the situation
Check overdelivery A Note about the situation
Relevant for picking Selected
StLocation required Selected
Determine SLoc Selected
AutoBatchDeterm Selected
4. Choose Save.
5. Choose Back.
Result The delivery item category is defined.
3.24.2 Defining and Assigning Text Determination Procedures
UseThe text types of a text object are grouped together in text determination procedures. You assign a text determination procedure using certain keys, for example, account group customer or sales document type.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
© SAP AGPage 78 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Text Control Define and Assign Text Determination Procedures
Menu IMG 3.24.2.1 Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Controle de texto Definir e atribuir esquemas de texto
Transaction Code VOTXN
2. In the Text object pane, select Item radio under Delivery and choose Change.
3. In the Dialog Structure pane, double-click Text procedure assignment.
4. In the YBAO row, make the following entries:
Item Cat TextDetermProcedure Description
YBAO 02 Standard Item IM
5. Choose Save.
6. Choose Back twice.
3.25 SIS Configuration
3.25.1 SIS Header Configuration
UseThis activity will make the necessary settings at the header level for Sales Information System settings
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics – General Logistics Information System (LIS) Logistics Data Warehouse Updating Updating Control Settings: Sales Update Group Assign Update Group at Header Level
Menu IMG Logística geral Sistema de informação para logística (SIL) Logistics Data Warehouse Controle da atualização Configurações Vendas Grupo de atualização Atribuir grupo de atualização a nível de cabeçalho
Transaction Code OVRO
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Make the following entries:
Field Name User action and values
Sales Org 1000
Dist Channel 10
Division 10
Customer Stats Group 1
StatGrpSales Doc 01
Update Group 000001
© SAP AGPage 79 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
4. Choose Save.
5. Choose Back.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5, using a StatGrpSalesDoc of 02 and an Update Group of 000002.
3.25.2 SIS Item Configuration
UseIn this activity, you make all the necessary settings at item level for the Sales Information System.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics General Logistics Information System (LIS) Logistics Data Warehouse Updating Updating Control Settings: Sales Update Group Assign Update Group at Item Level
Menu IMG Logística geral Sistema de informação para logística (SIL) Logistics Data Warehouse Controle da atualização Configurações Vendas Grupo de atualização Atribuir grupo de atualização a nível de item
Transaction Code OVRP
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Make the following entries:
Field Name User action and values
Sales Org 1000 (1100)
Dist Channel 10
Division 10
Customer Stats Group 1
CustGroupMaterial 1
StatGrpSales Doc 01
StatGrpDocumentItm 1
Update Group 000001
4. Choose Save.
5. Choose Back.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5, using the following data:
Field Name One Two Three
Sales Org 1000 (1100) 1000 (1100) 1000 (1100)
Dist Channel 10 10 10
Division 10 10 10
Customer Stats Group 1 1 1
CustGroupMaterial 1 1 1
StatGrpSales Doc 01 02 02
StatGrpDocumentItm 02 01 02
© SAP AGPage 80 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Field Name One Two Three
Update Group 000002 000001 000002
3.25.2.1 Activate SIS Info Structures
UseIn this activity, you activate the Sales Info Structures.
Procedure 1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics – General Logistics Information System (LIS) Logistics Data Warehouse Updating Updating Control Activate Update
Menu IMG Logística geral Logistics Data Warehouse Atualização Controle da atualização Ativar atualização
Transaction Code SPRO / OMO1
2. In the Choose Activity dialog box, double-click Sales and Distribution.
3. Double-click on Info Structure S001.
4. On the Parameters dialog box, make the following entries:
Field name User action and values
InfoStrc S001
Period split Posting period
Fiscal year variant K4
Updating Asynchronous updating (2)
5. Choose Continue.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5, using the following data:
Field name S003 S004
InfoStrc S003 S004
Period split Posting period Posting period
Fiscal year variant K4 K4
Updating Asynchronous updating (2) Asynchronous updating (2)
7. Choose Save.
8. Choose Back.
© SAP AGPage 81 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.26 LE Output Control
3.26.1 Maintaining output determination procedures for outbound deliveries
UseThis activity defines output determination procedures for documents.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Output Control Output Determination Maintain Output Determination for Outbound Deliveries Maintain Output Determination Procedure
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Bases Controle de mensagens Determinação de mensagens Atualizar determinação de mensagens para entregas Atualizar esquema de mensagens
Transaction Code SM34 (Customizing Object VVC_T683_XX_V2)
2. Highlight the row containing V10000 Header Output and then double-click Control data.
3. Choose New Entries, and maintain the following data:
Step Cntr Ctyp Requirement
10 1 LD00 1
30 0 WMTA 32
50 1 YBL1 1
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.26.2 Maintaining Output Determination Procedure for Shipping Units - Control
UseIn this activity, you maintain the output determination procedure for shipping units.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics General Handling Unit Management Output Maintain Output Determination for Handling Units Maintain Output Determination Procedure
Menu IMG Logística geral Administração de unidades comerciais Mensagens Atualizar determinação de mensagens para unidades comerciais Atualizar esquema de mensagens
Transaction Code SM34 (Customizing Object VVC_T683_XX_V6)
2. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
© SAP AGPage 82 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Field Name Description User action and values Notes
Procedure 000001
Descript. Standard
3. Choose Save.
4. Highlight the row you just created and then double-click Control Data.
5. Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data:
Step Cntr Ctyp Requirement
10 30 MALB
6. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.27 Sales Order Processing II
3.27.1 Maintaining Copy Control for Sales Documents (QT)
UseIn this activity, you maintain the copy control for sales document type QT.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Maintain Copy Control for Sales Documents
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Atualizar controle de cópia para docs.vendas
Transaction Code VTAA
2. Double-click Copying Control: Sales Document to Sales Document.
3. Choose Display Change.
4. Choose New Entries.
5. Make the following entries:
Target SalesDocType QT
From SalesDocType QT
Copying requirements 001
Data transfer VBAK 051
Data transfer VBKD 101
Data transfer VBPA 001
Copy Item Number Selected
6. Choose Save.
7. Choose Back.
8. Select the row you just created and then in the Dialog Structure pane, double-click Item.
9. Choose New Entries.
10. Make the following entries:
ItemCatProposal AGN
Item Category AGN
© SAP AGPage 83 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Copying Reqmts 301
Data Xfer VBAP 151
Data Xfer VBKD 102
Data Xfer VBPA 002
Data Xfer FPLA 251
Copy Sched Lines X
Update Doc Flow X
Pos./neg. quantity +
Pricing type D
11. Choose Save.
12. Choose Back twice.
13. Select the row you just created and then in the Dialog Structure pane, double-click Schedule Line.
14. Choose New Entries.
15. Make the following entries:
SchdLneCatProposal BN
Sched.Line Cat. BN
DataT 201
Copying Requirements 501
16. Choose Save.
17. Choose Back.
18. Repeat these steps for the following information:
Target SalesDocType QT
From SalesDocType IN
Copying requirements 001
Data transfer VBAK 051
Data transfer VBKD 101
Data transfer VBPA 001
Copy Item Number Selected
Proposed item cat AGC AGN AGNN
Item category AFC AFN AFNN AFTX AFX
Copying Reqmts 301 301 301 301 301
Data Xfer VBAP 151 151 151 151 151
Data Xfer VBKD 102 102 102 102 102
Data Xfer VBPA 002 002 002 002 002
Data Xfer FPLA 251 251 251 251 251
Copy Sched lLines X X X X
© SAP AGPage 84 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Update Doc Flow X X X X X
Pos./neg. quantity + + + + +
Pricing type B B D D B
Sched.Line Cat. AT BP
DataT 201 201
Copying Requirements 501 501
3.27.2 Assigning Item Categories
UseThis activity will assign item categories to sales documents.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Item Assign Item Categories
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Item do documento de vendas Definir categorias de item
Transaction Code SM30 (Customizing Object V_T184)
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Make the following entries:
Sales Document Type
Item Category Group
Default Item Category
Manual Item category
Manual Item category
Manual Item category
Manual Item category
Manual Item category
Manual Item category
Manual Item category
OR NORM TAN TAP TAQ TANN TAW DSI TAO YBAO
IN YBNA AFN
4. Choose Save.
3.27.3 Defining Item Categories
UseThis activity will define item categories.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Item Define Item Categories
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Item do documento de vendas Definir categorias de item
Transaction Code VOV7
© SAP AGPage 85 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
2. Choose New Entries.
3. Make the following entries:
Item category
Billing Relevance
Billing Plan Type
PricingBusiness item
Sched.Line Allowed
Wght/Vol.Relevant
Determine Cost
Credit active
Screen Seq.Grp
Special Stock
YB1 B X X X X X N
YB2 F X X X X X X N
YB01 X X N
YB05 X X X X X N
YBAB A X X X X X N E
YBAO I Y1 X X X X X N
Item category Description
YB1 3rd Party with SN
YB2 3rd Party w/o SN
YB01 Ret. Packaging del.
YB05 Batch Split Item
YBAB Bought-In Item
YBAO Free of Charge Item
4. Choose Save.
5. Choose Back.
3.27.4 Setting up Partner Determination Procedure Assignment for Item categories
Use
In this activity, you define the rules that should be used to perform automatic partner determination.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Partner Determination Set Up Partner Determination
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação de parceiro Definir determinação do parceiro
Transaction Code SM34 (Customizing Object VC_TPAR_VP)
© SAP AGPage 86 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
2. On the Choose Activity screen choose Set Up Partner Determination for Sales Document Item.
3. On the Change View “Partner Determination Procedures”: Overview screen select N (Standard item).
4. From the dialog structure on the left of the screen, choose Partner Determination Procedure Assignment.
5. Make the following assignments:
Item category Description
YB1 T
YB2 T
YB01 N
YB05 N
YBAB T
3.27.5 Maintaining Item Category Assign Text Determination Procedure
Use In this activity, you assign the text determination procedure to item categories.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Text Control Define and Assign Text Determination Procedures
Menu IMG 3.27.5.1 Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Controle de texto Definir e atribuir esquemas de texto
Transaction Code VOTXN
2. On the Customizing Text Determination screen, select Sales Document – Item and choose Change.
3. From the dialog structure on the left of the screen, choose Text procedure assignment.
4. Make the following assignments.
Item category TextDetermProcedure
YB1 01
YB2 01
YB01
YB05 01
YBAB 01
YBAO 01
5. Choose Save.
Result The text determination procedure is assigned.
© SAP AGPage 87 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.27.6 Assigning Incompleteness Procedures
Use In this activity, you assign incompleteness procedures to item categories.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Log of incomplete item l Assign Incompleteness Procedures
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Dados incompletos Atribuir esquemas de dados incompletos
Transaction Code VUP2
2. On the Choose Activity screen choose Assign procedures to the item categories.
3. Make the following assignments.
Item category Incompletion procedure
YB1 28
YB2 28
YB01
YB05 20
YBAB 28
3.27.7 Maintaining Copying Control Delivery Document to Billing Document
UseIn this activity you specify copy controls.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Maintain Copying Control For Billing Documents
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Atualizar controle de cópia para docs.faturamento
Transaction Code VTFL
2. Choose Copying Control: Delivery document to billing document in the dialog box Choose Activity.
3. On the Change View: “Header”: Overview screen, mark the relevant lines with billing type and delivery type in the dialog box Header.
4. Make the following entries:
Target Bill TypeFrom Delivery Type
Assignment Number
Reference Number
Copying requirements
© SAP AGPage 88 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
F2 LF 003
F8 LF 009
5. Select the relevant combinations and double click on Item in the Dialog Structure.
6. On the Change View “Item”: Overview screen make the following entries:
Target Bill Type y From Delivery Type Item Category Bill Qty VBRK/VBRP
F2 LF TAN G 001
F2 LF TANN G
F2 LF TAQ G
F8 LF TAN D 001
F8 LF TANN D
F8 LF TAQ D
Note that the Billing quantity is set to G (Cumulative batch quantity minus invoiced quantity) to allow the billing of batch split items.
7. Save your settings.
© SAP AGPage 89 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.4 PREPARE SD BRAZILIAN LOCALIZATION (O035)
3.27.8 SD BILLING
3.27.8.1Billing: Document Types
Use The purpose of this activity is to define billing types.
Procedure 1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Define Billing Types
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Definir tipo de documento de faturamento
Transaction Code SPRO / VOFA
2. In the dialog box, choose the activity Define Billing Types.
3. On the Change View “Define Billing Types”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4. Make the following entries:
Billing Type DescriptionF2B Nota FiscalFA Advance Invoice BRFAR Fut. Dely Invoice BRFC NF Consign.IssueFCR NF Consign.Fill-upFST NF for Ship TOFTB NF TransferG2B Credit Memo BRL2B Debit Memo BRREB Cr. Returns BRYIV Intercompany Billing BR
4. On the Change View “Define Billing Types”: Details screen, make the entries:
Number systems
Billing Type No. Range int. Assgn. Item no. increment
F2B 19
FA 19
FAR 19
FC 19
FCR 19
FST 19
FTB 19
G2B 19
L2B 19 1
REB 19
© SAP AGPage 90 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Billing Type No. Range int. Assgn. Item no. increment
YIV 19
General Control
Billing Type
SD doc. Cat.
Transac. Group
Post. Block
Stat. Inv. List type
Rel. For rebate
Other fields
F2B M 7 X LR X leave blank
FA M 7 X LR X leave blank
FAR M 7 X LR X leave blank
FC M 7 X LR X leave blank
FCR M 7 X LR X leave blank
FST M 7 X LR X leave blank
FTB M 7 X LR X leave blank
G2B O 7 X LG X leave blank
L2B P 7 X LR X leave blank
REB O 7 X X LG X leave blank
YIV I 7 X LR X leave blank
Cancelation
Billing Type Canc. Billing type Other fields
F2B S1 leave blank
FA S1
FAR S1
FC S1
FCR S1
FST S1
FTB S1
G2B S2
L2B S1
REB S2
YIV IVS
Account assignment/pricing
Billing Type Acct.Determ.Proc Acct.det.pay.cards Doc.pric. procedure
Other fields
F2B KOFI00 A00001 A leave blank
FA KOFI00 A00001 E leave blank
FAR KOFI00 A00001 F leave blank
FC KOFI00 A00001 M leave blank
© SAP AGPage 91 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Billing Type Acct.Determ.Proc Acct.det.pay.cards Doc.pric. procedure
Other fields
FCR KOFI00 A00001 K leave blank
FST KOFI00 A00001 A leave blank
FTB KOFI00 A00001 A leave blank
G2B KOFI00 A00001 leave blank
L2B KOFI00 A00001 leave blank
REB KOFI00 A00001 leave blank
YIV KOFI00 A00001 I leave blank
Output/partners/texts
Bill
ing
T
ype
Ou
tpu
t d
eter
m.
Pro
ced
.
Ap
plic
atio
n
Ou
tpu
t ty
pe
He
ad.
Par
tn.
Item
p
artn
.
Tex
t d
eter
m
Pro
ced
Tex
t d
et.
Pro
ced
. It
em
De
liver
y te
xt
Oth
er
fiel
ds
F2B V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 leave blank
FA V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 leave blank
FAR V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 X leave blank
FC V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 leave blank
FCR V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 leave blank
FST V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 leave blank
FTB V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 leave blank
G2B V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 leave blank
L2B V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 leave blank
REB V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 leave blank
YIV V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 leave blank
5. Choose Save.
6. Choose Back.
© SAP AGPage 92 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.27.9 SD SALES DOCUMENTS
3.27.9.1Incompletion Log
Use
In this IMG activity, you define the incompleteness procedures that should apply to the various incompleteness objects.
Procedure1. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Configuration Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Log of Incomplete Terms Define Incompletion Procedures
Menu IMGConfiguration Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Dados incompletos Definir esquemas de dados incompletos
Transaction Code OVA2
2. Select A: Sales Header, and double click on Procedures.
3. Select Change (Ctrl + F4), then New Entries (F5), and enter the following entries:
In Procedure Description11 Standard Order12 Outline Agreement14 Credit Memo15 Debit MemoJC Order with Cust. NFJH Return with Cust. NFJP RTP Ret. w. Cust. NFJQ RTP Ret. w. Own NFJS Order f. NF Simp. Ft
4. Select each one of the entries above and double click on Fields. Enter the following entries:
Incomp. Proced.
Table Field Name Status group Send warning Screen Process. Seq.
11 VBAK AUDAT 1 KKAU 011 VBAK WAERK 3 KKAU 011 VBKD BSTKD 1 X KBES 011 VBKD INCO1 4 KDE3 011 VBKD PRSDT 4 KKAU 011 VBKD ZTERM 3 X KDE3 012 VBAK AUDAT 1 KKAU 012 VBAK GUEBG 4 X KKAU 012 VBAK GUEEN 4 X KKAU 012 VBAK VSBED 2 KDE2 012 VBAK WAERK 4 KKAU 012 VBKD BSTKD 1 KBES 012 VBKD INCO1 4 KDE3 012 VBKD KURSK 3 KKAU 012 VBKD PRSDT 4 KKAU 012 VBKD ZTERM 4 KDE3 014 VBAK AUDAT 1 KKAU 0
© SAP AGPage 93 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Incomp. Proced.
Table Field Name Status group Send warning Screen Process. Seq.
14 VBAK AUGRU 3 X KKAU 014 VBAK WAERK 3 KKAU 014 VBKD KURSK 3 KKAU 014 VBKD PRSDT 3 KKAU 015 VBAK AUDAT 1 KKAU 015 VBAK AUGRU 4 KKAU 015 VBAK WAERK 3 KKAU 015 VBKD PRSDT 3 KKAU 015 VBKD ZTERM 3 KDE3 0JC VBAK AUDAT 1 KKAU 0JC VBAK WAERK 3 KKAU 0JC VBAK XBLNR 2 KBUC 0JC VBKD BSTKD 1 X KBES 0JC VBKD INCO1 4 KDE3 0JC VBKD PRSDT 4 KKAU 0JC VBKD ZTERM 3 X KDE3 0JH VBAK AUDAT 1 KKAU 0JH VBAK WAERK 3 KKAU 0JH VBAK XBLNR 2 KBUC 0JH VBKD BSTKD 1 X KBES 0JH VBKD INCO1 4 KDE3 0JH VBKD PRSDT 4 KKAU 0JH VBKD ZTERM 3 X KDE3 0JP VBAK AUDAT 1 KKAU 0JP VBAK WAERK 3 KKAU 0JP VBAK XBLNR 2 KBUC 0JP VBKD BSTKD 1 X KBES 0JP VBKD INCO1 4 KDE3 0JP VBKD PRSDT 4 KKAU 0JP VBKD ZTERM 3 X KDE3 0JQ VBAK AUDAT 1 KKAU 0JQ VBAK WAERK 3 KKAU 0JQ VBAK XBLNR 2 KBUC 0JQ VBKD BSTKD 1 X KBES 0JQ VBKD INCO1 4 KDE3 0JQ VBKD PRSDT 4 KKAU 0JQ VBKD ZTERM 3 X KDE3 0JS VBAK AUDAT 1 KKAU 0JS VBAK WAERK 3 KKAU 0JS VBKD BSTKD 1 X KBES 0JS VBKD INCO1 4 KDE3 0JS VBKD PRSDT 4 KKAU 0JS VBKD ZTERM 3 X KDE3 0
5. Choose Save.
6. Select B: Sales Item, and double click on Procedures.
7. Select Change (Ctrl + F4), then New Entries (F5), and enter the following entries:
In Procedure DescriptionB1 Standard Item BRB2 Free of Charge BRB3 Value Item BRBC Cons./Packaging BR
© SAP AGPage 94 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
In Procedure DescriptionBT Third-Party Item BR
8. Select each one of the entries above and double click on Fields. Enter the following entries:
Incomp. Proced.
Table Field Name Status group Send warning Screen Process. Seq.
B1 VBAP ANZSN 4 POTO 0B1 VBAP ARKTX 4 PKAU 0B1 VBAP BRGEW 4 PDE2 0B1 VBAP J_1BCFOP 3 PLND 0B1 VBAP J_1BTAXLW1 3 PLND 0B1 VBAP J_1BTAXLW2 3 PLND 0B1 VBAP J_1BTXSDC 3 PLND 0B1 VBAP KWMENG 4 X PKAU 10B1 VBAP NETWR 4 PKON 0B1 VBAP NTGEW 4 PDE2 0B1 VBAP OBJNR 1 PKNT 0B1 VBAP PRSOK 6 PKON 0B1 VBAP TECHS 2 POEF 0B1 VBAP VSTEL 2 PDE2 0B1 VBAP WERKS 2 PDE2 20B1 VBKD INCO1 4 PDE3 0B1 VBKD PRSDT 4 PKAU 0B1 VBKD ZTERM 4 PDE3 0B2 VBAP ANZSN 4 POTO 0B2 VBAP ARKTX 3 PKAU 0B2 VBAP BRGEW 1 PDE2 0B2 VBAP J_1BCFOP 3 PLND 0B2 VBAP J_1BTAXLW1 3 PLND 0B2 VBAP J_1BTAXLW2 3 PLND 0B2 VBAP J_1BTXSDC 3 PLND 0B2 VBAP KWMENG 2 PKAU 0B2 VBAP PRSOK 6 PKON 0B2 VBAP TECHS 2 POEF 0B2 VBAP VSTEL 2 PDE2 0B2 VBAP WERKS 4 PDE2 0B3 VBAP ARKTX 4 PKAU 0B3 VBAP J_1BTXSDC 3 PLND 0B3 VBAP PRSOK 4 PKON 0B3 VBAP WERKS 2 PDE2 0B3 VBKD PRSDT 4 PKAU 0B3 VBKD ZTERM 4 PDE3 0BC VBAP ANZSN 4 POTO 0BC VBAP ARKTX 4 PKAU 0BC VBAP BRGEW 4 PDE2 0BC VBAP J_1BCFOP 3 PLND 0BC VBAP J_1BTAXLW1 3 PLND 0BC VBAP J_1BTAXLW2 3 PLND 0BC VBAP J_1BTXSDC 3 PLND 0BC VBAP KWMENG 4 X PKAU 10BC VBAP NETWR 4 PKON 0BC VBAP NTGEW 4 PDE2 0BC VBAP OBJNR 1 PKNT 0
© SAP AGPage 95 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Incomp. Proced.
Table Field Name Status group Send warning Screen Process. Seq.
BC VBAP PRSOK 6 PKON 0BC VBAP TECHS 2 POEF 0BC VBAP VSTEL 2 PDE2 0BC VBAP WERKS 2 PDE2 20BC VBKD INCO1 4 PDE3 0BC VBKD PRSDT 4 PKAU 0BC VBKD ZTERM 4 PDE3 0BT VBAP ARKTX 4 PKAU 0BT VBAP J_1BCFOP 3 PLND 0BT VBAP J_1BTAXLW1 3 PLND 0BT VBAP J_1BTAXLW2 3 PLND 0BT VBAP J_1BTXSDC 3 PLND 0BT VBAP PRSOK 4 PKON 0BT VBAP WERKS 2 PDE2 0BT VBKD PRSDT 4 PKAU 0BT VBKD ZTERM 4 PDE3 0
3.27.9.2Maintain Sales Order Types
UseThe sales documents types represent the different business transactions in Sales and perform a central controlling function for the entire sales order process.
Procedure1. Access the activity by the following navigation and note the corresponding BC-Set:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Header Define Sales Document Types
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Cabeçalho de documento de vendas Definir tipos de doc.vendas
Transaction Code VOV8
2. On screen Modificar visão “Atualização dos tipos de ordem: Síntese ”, check the sales orders types configurations and change them if necessary.
TipoDV Denominação
COB Sched. Agreement BR
CRB Credit Memo Req. BR
CXB Corr. f. Error BR
DLB Dely w/o Order BR
DRB Debit Memo Req. BR
DXB Debit Memo Req. BR
KBB Consignment Issue BR
KEB Consignment Sales BR
LAB Ret. Pack. Pickup BR
ORB Standard Order BRA
RCM Rem.p/cta.e ord.merc
© SAP AGPage 96 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
TipoDV Denominação
RCS Rem.p/ cta. simpl.f.
REB Returns Customer NF
ROB Returns Own NF
VDOR Venda a Ordem BR
VEF Future Dlvy Sales
VEFR Future Dlvy Shipment
YCO Quotation BR
Header
Sales Doc Type SD document categ Other fields…
COB E blank
CRB K blank
CXB K blank
DLB C blank
DRB L blank
DXB L blank
KBB C blank
KEB C blank
LAB C blank
ORB C blank
RCM C blank
RCS L blank
REB H blank
ROB H blank
VDOR C blank
VEF L blank
VEFR C blank
YCO B blank
Number systems
Sales Doc Type
Internal range External range Item increment Sub-item increment
COB 07 08 10 10
CRB 13 14 10 10
CXB 13 14 10 10
DLB 01 02 10 10
DRB 15 16 10 10
© SAP AGPage 97 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Sales Doc Type
Internal range External range Item increment Sub-item increment
DXB 15 16 10 10
KBB 01 08 10 10
KEB 01 08 10 10
LAB 13 14 10 10
ORB 01 02 10 10
RCM 01 02 10 10
RCS 15 16 10 10
REB 13 14 10 10
ROB 13 14 10 10
VDOR 01 02 10 10
VEF 15 16 10 10
VEFR 01 02 10 10
YCO 05 90 10 10
General Control
Sal
es D
oc
T
ype
Re
f.
Man
dat
ory
Ch
eck
div
isio
n
Pro
ba
bi.
Ch
eck
cred
it li
mit
Cre
dit
g
rou
p
Ou
tpu
t ap
plic
.
Item
d
ivis
ion
Re
ad in
fo-
reco
rd
Oth
er
fiel
ds
COB 100 A V1 X blank
CRB M 100 V1 X blank
CXB M 100 V1 X blank
DLB 100 V1 X blank
DRB M 0 V1 X blank
DXB M 0 V1 X blank
KBB 1 100 C V1 X blank
KEB M 1 100 V1 X blank
LAB M 100 V1 X blank
ORB 2 100 V1 X X blank
RCM 2 100 V1 X X blank
RCS M 0 V1 X blank
REB M 100 V1 X blank
ROB M 100 V1 X blank
VDOR 2 100 V1 X X blank
VEF 0 V1 X blank
VEFR M 2 100 01 V1 X X blank
YCO 070 V1 X blank
© SAP AGPage 98 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Transaction Flow
Sal
es D
oc
T
ype
Scr
een
se
q.
Gro
up
Inco
mp
l. P
roce
du
.
Tra
nsa
ctio
n g
rou
p
Do
c.p
ric
pro
ced
ure
Dis
pla
y ra
ng
e
Fco
de
for
ove
rv. S
cr
Ou
tlin
e
agrm
t m
es
Pro
dA
ttr
mes
sag
Oth
er
fiel
ds
COB LP 12 3 A UALL UER2 blank
CRB GA 14 0 A UALL UER2 blank
CXB GA 14 0 A UALL UER2 blank
DLB AU 0 A UALL UER2 blank
DRB GA 15 0 A UALL UER2 blank
DXB GA 15 0 A UALL UER2 blank
KBB AU 0 K UALL UER2 blank
KEB AU 11 0 M UALL UER1 blank
LAB AU 0 A UALL UER1 blank
ORB AU 11 0 A UALL UER1 A blank
RCM AU JC 0 A UALL UER1 A blank
RCS GA JS 0 A UALL UER1 blank
REB RE JH 0 A UALL UER1 blank
ROB RE 14 0 A UALL UER1 blank
VDOR AU 11 0 A UALL UER1 A blank
VEF GA JS 0 E UALL UER2 blank
VEFR AU 11 0 F UALL UER1 A blank
YCO AU 10 2 A UALL UER2 blank
Sceduling Agreement
Sales Order Type All Fields…
COB blank
CRB blank
CXB blank
DLB blank
DRB blank
DXB blank
KBB blank
KEB blank
LAB blank
ORB blank
RCM blank
LAB blank
REB blank
ROB blank
© SAP AGPage 99 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Sales Order Type All Fields…
VDOR blank
VEF blank
VEFR blank
YCO blank
Shipping
Sales Order Type
Delivery Type Shipping conditions
Immediate delivery
Other fields…
COB LF blank
CRB blank
CXB blank
DLB blank
DRB blank
DXB blank
KBB LF blank
KEB LF blank
LAB LR blank
ORB LF 01 blank
RCM LF blank
REB LR blank
ROB LR blank
VDOR LF blank
VEF blank
VEFR LF blank
YCO LF 01 blank
Billing
Sal
es D
oc
T
ype
Dlv
-rel
bill
ing
ty
pe
Ord
er-
rel
bill
ing
typ
e
Inte
rom
p.b
ill.
typ
e
Bill
ing
pla
n
typ
e
Bill
ing
blo
ck
Cn
dT
ype
line
item
s
Bill
ing
pla
n
typ
e
Pay
mt
gu
aran
t. P
roc
Pay
mt
card
p
lan
typ
e
Ch
ecki
ng
g
rou
p
Oth
er f
ield
s
COB F2B blank
CRB G2B 08 02 01 03 01 blank
CXB G2B 08 02 01 03 01 blank
DLB FTB FTB IV blank
DRB L2B IV 09 EK01 02 01 03 01 blank
© SAP AGPage 100 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Sal
es D
oc
T
ype
Dlv
-rel
bill
ing
ty
pe
Ord
er-
rel
bill
ing
typ
e
Inte
rom
p.b
ill.
typ
e
Bill
ing
pla
n
typ
e
Bill
ing
blo
ck
Cn
dT
ype
line
item
s
Bill
ing
pla
n
typ
e
Pay
mt
gu
aran
t. P
roc
Pay
mt
card
p
lan
typ
e
Ch
ecki
ng
g
rou
p
Oth
er f
ield
s
DXB L2B IV 09 EK01 02 01 03 01 blank
KBB FCR FCR blank
KEB FC FC IV blank
LAB REB REB blank
ORB F2B F2B YIV EK02 01 03 01 blank
RCM FST FST IV EK02 01 03 01 blank
RCS F2B IV EK01 02 01 03 01 blank
REB REB REB IG 08 01 03 01 blank
ROB REB REB IG 08 01 03 01 blank
VDOR F2B F2B IV EK02 01 03 01 blank
VEF FA FA IV EK01 02 01 03 01 blank
VEFR FAR FAR IV EK02 01 03 01 blank
YCO F2B F2B 01 03 01 blank
Requested delivery date/purchase order date
Sales Order Type Propose del. Date Date Type Other fields…
COB X blank
CRB X blank
CXB X blank
DLB X blank
DRB X blank
DXB X blank
KBB X blank
KEB X blank
LAB X blank
ORB X blank
RCM X blank
RCS X blank
REB X blank
ROB X blank
VDOR X blank
VEF X blank
VEFR X blank
YCO X blank
© SAP AGPage 101 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Contract
TipoOrd Billing request Subs.order type Other fields
COB blank
CRB blank
CXB blank
DLB blank
DRB blank
DXB blank
KBB blank
KEB blank
LAB blank
ORB blank
RCM blank
RCS blank
REB blank
ROB SD blank
VDOR DR SD blank
VEF blank
VEFR blank
YCO blank
7. Choose Save.
8. Choose Back.
3.27.9.3Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types (BR)
Use
In this menu option, you allocate the allowed order types to each sales area.
Procedure1. vAccess the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Documents Header Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Cabeçalho de documento de vendas Atribuir área de vendas a tipos de documento de vendas
Transaction Code SPRO / SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVAKZ)
2. In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Assign sales order types permitted for sales areas.
3. On the Change View: Sales Documents. Allowed Order Types per Sales Org.: Overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries:
© SAP AGPage 102 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Reference Sales Organization
Reference Distribution Channel
Reference Division Sales Document Type
1000 10 10 QT
1000 10 10 COB
1000 10 10 ORB
1000 10 10 RCM
1000 10 10 RCS
1000 10 10 REB
1000 10 10 ROB
1000 10 10 VDOR
1000 10 10 VEF
1000 10 10 VEFR
1000 10 10 CRB
1000 10 10 CXB
1000 10 10 DLB
1000 10 10 DRB
1000 10 10 DXB
1000 10 10 KBB
1000 10 10 KEB
1000 10 10 LAB
1000 10 10 YCO
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
3.27.9.4Assign Price Procedure to Billing type
Use
You define the pricing procedures in this step. In addition, you assign the pricing procedures to the transactions by defining the following dependencies:
Customer
Sales document type
Sales area
Procedure1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Master Data Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define And Assign Pricing Procedures
Menu IMGVendas e Distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Item do documento de venda Definir categorias de item
© SAP AGPage 103 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On screen Modificar visão “Billing Types – Billing Procedures ” Overview, make the following entries:
Billing Type Doc.Pric.ProcedureF2B AFA E
FAR FFC M
FCR KFST AFTB AG2B L2B REB YIV I
5. Choose Save.
6. Choose Back.
3.27.9.5Assign Incompletion Procedures For Sales Document Type
Use
In this step, you assign procedures to the different incompleteness objects.
Procedure1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Log of Incomplete Items Assign Incompleteness Procedures
Menu IMGVendas e Distribuição Funções básicas Dados incompletos Atribuir esquemas de dados incompletos
Transaction Code SPRO
2. Double click in: Assign procedures to the sales document types
On screen Modificar visão “Error Logs for Sales Documents Header: Overview”, make the following entries:
Sales Doc Type Procedure
COB 12CRB 14CXB 14DLB DRB 15DXB 15KBB KEB 11LAB ORB 11RCM JC
© SAP AGPage 104 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Sales Doc Type Procedure
RCS JSREB JHROB 14
VDOR 11VEF JS
VEFR 11YCO 10
3. Choose Save.
4. Choose Back.
3.27.10 SD SALES DOCUMENT ITEM CATEGORIES
3.27.10.1 Define Item Categories for sales order
Use
In this step, you assign procedures to the different incompleteness objects.
Procedure1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:
IMG MenuSales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Item Define Item Categories
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Item do documento de vendas e distribuição Definir categorias de item
Transaction Code SPRO / VOV7
Item Category DescriptionKBNB Consignment Fill-upKENB Consignment IssueLANB RTP Pickup BrazilLBNL RTP Pickup stat. NFLPNB Sched.Agreem.Item BRNLNB ST.StockTransf.ItmBRRBB ST Item Batch BRRBN ST Item BRTBB ST Item Batch BRTBD Dienstleistung BRTBL RTP Shipment BRTBLL RTP Statistic BrazilTBN ST Item BR
TBNL Consignment Fill-upTBS Item rem. a terc. BRTBX Non Stock Item BR
TANN Free of Charge Item
Business Data
© SAP AGPage 105 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Item
C
ate
go
ry
Sp
eci
al
sto
ck
Bill
rel
evan
Pri
cin
g
stat
isti
cal
Bu
sin
ess
it
em
Sch
ed. L
ine
allo
wed
Re
turn
s
Wg
ht/
Vo
l.rel
evan
ce
Cre
dit
ac
t
De
term
Co
st
Oth
ers
KBNB A X X X X Blank
KENB W A X X X X X X Blank
LANB B X Y X X X X Blank
LBNL B X X X X X X Blank
LPNB A X X X X X X Blank
NLNB J X X X Blank
RBB B X X X X X Blank
RBN B X X X X X Blank
TBB A X X X X X Blank
TBD B X X X X Blank
TBL A X Y X X X Blank
TBLL A X X X X X Blank
TBN A X X X X X Blank
TBNL A X Y X X X X Blank
TBS F X X X X X X Blank
TBX A X X X X X Blank
TANN A X X X X Blank
General Control
Item category All fields
KBNB Blank
KENB Blank
LANB Blank
LBNL Blank
LPNB Blank
NLNB Blank
RBB Blank
RBN Blank
TBB Blank
TBD Blank
TBL Blank
TBLL Blank
TBN Blank
TBNL Blank
TBS Blank
© SAP AGPage 106 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Item category All fields
TBX Blank
TANN Blank
Transaction Flow
Itm Cat Incompl proced
Partner Det Procedure
Text Det Procedure
Itm cat status grp
Scr seq grp
Others
KBNB BC N 01 N Blank
KENB B1 N 01 N Blank
LANB B3 N 01 N Blank
LBNL B3 N 01 N Blank
LPNB 22 N 01 1 N Blank
NLNB 20 N 01 1 N Blank
RBB B1 N 01 2 N Blank
RBN B1 N 01 2 N Blank
TBB B1 N 01 1 N Blank
TBD B3 T 01 1 N Blank
TBL B3 N 01 N Blank
TBLL B3 N 01 N Blank
TBN B1 B 01 1 N Blank
TBNL Blank
TBS BT T 01 1 N Blank
TBX 25 N 01 1 N Blank
TANN 24 N 01 1 N Blank
Bill of material / configuration
Item Category All fields
KBNB Blank
KENB Blank
LANB Blank
LBNL Blank
LPNB Blank
NLNB Blank
RBB Blank
RBN Blank
TBB Blank
TBD Blank
TBL Blank
TBLL Blank
© SAP AGPage 107 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Item Category All fields
TBN Blank
TBNL Blank
TBS Blank
TBX Blank
TANN Blank
Value Contract
Item Category All fields
KBNB Blank
KENB Blank
LANB Blank
LBNL Blank
LPNB Blank
NLNB Blank
RBB Blank
RBN Blank
TBB Blank
TBD Blank
TBL Blank
TBLL Blank
TBN Blank
TBNL Blank
TBS Blank
TBX Blank
TANN Blank
Service Management
Item Category All fields
KBNB Blank
KENB Blank
LANB Blank
LBNL Blank
LPNB Blank
NLNB Blank
RBB Blank
RBN Blank
TBB Blank
TBD Blank
© SAP AGPage 108 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Item Category All fields
TBL Blank
TBLL Blank
TBN Blank
TBNL Blank
TBS Blank
TBX Blank
TANN Blank
Control of Resource-related billing and creation of quotations
Item Category All fields
KBNB Blank
KENB Blank
LANB Blank
LBNL Blank
LPNB Blank
NLNB Blank
RBB Blank
RBN Blank
TBB Blank
TBD Blank
TBL Blank
TBLL Blank
TBN Blank
TBNL Blank
TBS Blank
TBX Blank
TANN Blank
2. Choose Save.
3. Choose Back.
3.27.10.2 Assign Item categories
UseHere you can specify which item categories the system proposes during document processing for each sales document type and item category group.
Procedure1. Access the activity by the following navigation and note the corresponding BC-Set:
IMG MenuVendas e Distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Item do documento de venda Atribuir categorias de item
© SAP AGPage 109 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Menu IMG Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Documents Assign Item Categories
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On screen Modificar visão “Item Category Assignment:Overview ”, check the following entries and change them if necessary:
Sales Doc Type
Itm Categ. Group
Usage High level Item Cat.
Default Item Cat.
Manual Item cat.1
Manual Item cat.2
KBB NORM KBNB KEB NORM KENB LAB LEIH LANB LANB LAB LEIH RBN LANB RBN LAB VERP LANB RBN ORB DIEN TBDORB LEIH TBLL TBNORB LEIH TBX TBLL TBNORB LEIS TBDORB NORM TBN TANNORB NORM TBN TANNORB NORM FREE TBNORB NORM FREE TBN TANNRCM LEIH TBLL TBN RCM LEIS TBD TAW RCM NORM TBNL RCM NORM TANN TANN RCM VERP TBLL TBNL TBNL RCM VERP TBN TBNL TBNL RCS LEIS TBD TAW RCS NORM L2N REB LEIH LBNL LANB REB LEIH RBN LBNL LANB REB NORM RBN ROB LEIH LBNL LANB ROB LEIH RBN LBNL LANB ROB NORM RBN VDOR NORM TBS TANN VEF LEIH L2S TBLL VEF LEIS TBD TAW VEF NORM L2N VEF VERP L2N TBL VEFR DIEN TBX TAW VEFR LEIH TBLL TBN VEFR LEIS TBD TAW VEFR NORM TBN
3.27.10.3 Define Item Categories for Delivery
Use
In this menu option you define your item categories for deliveries. In connection with the delivery types, they represent the different business transactions in the SAP System.
© SAP AGPage 110 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Procedure1. To carry out the activity, choose one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Deliveries Define Item Categories for Deliveries
Menu IMG Logistics Execution Expedição Fornecimentos Definir tipos de item para fornecimentos
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On screen Modificar visão “Delivery Item categories ”: Overview, make the following entries:
Material/statistics
Item Category Document. Category
Mat. Nr 0 allow Item cat. Stat. group Stk. Determ. rule
KBNB J X 1KENB JLANB J 1LBNL J 1LPNB JNLNB J 1RBB TRBN TTBB J XTBL J 1TBLL J 1TBN J XTBNL JTBPS J 1TBX J
Quantity
Item Category
Check quantity 0
Check minimun qty
Check overdelivery
Avail Ck Off Rounding
KBNB A A AKENB A A ALANB A A ALBNL A A ALPNB A ANLNB ARBB ARBN ATBB A A ATBL A A ATBLL A ATBN A ATBNLTBPSTBX A A
Warehouse control and packing
© SAP AGPage 111 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Item Category Relevant for picking
STLocation required
Determine SLoc
Auto. Batch determ
others
KBNB X X X X blankKENB X X X blankLANB X X blankLBNL X X blankLPNB X X X blankNLNB X X X blankRBB X X blankRBN X X blankTBB X X X X blankTBL X X X blankTBLL X X X blankTBN X X X X blankTBNL X blankTBPS X X X blankTBX blank
Transaction Flow
Item Category Text Determ. proced Standard text
KBNB 02KENB 02LANBLBNLLPNBNLNB 02RBBRBNTBBTBLTBLLTBN 02TBNLTBPSTBX
3.27.10.4 Defining Item Category Determination in Deliveries
UseThis step defines item category determination in deliveries.
ProcedureAccess the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG MenuLogistics Execution Shipping Deliveries Define Item Category Determination in Deliveries
Menú IMGLogistics Execution Expedición Entregas Definir tipos de posición para entregas
Transaction Code 0184
On the Change View “Delivery item category determination”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
© SAP AGPage 112 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Make the following entries:
DlvT ITCG Usg. ITHLV ITMC
LF NORM TAN
LF NORM CHSP KLN KLN
LF NORM PACK DLN
LF NORM PSEL TAX TAPS
YNLC 0001 V NLC
YNLC ERLA CHSP NLC
YNLC LEER V NLCU
YNLC LEER V NLCG NLCZ
YNLC NORM ULN
YNLC NORM CHSP NLC
YNLC NORM V NLC
YNLC VERP DLX
YNLC VOLL V NLCG
Choose Save .
Choose Back .
3.27.10.5 Assign Schedule Line
Use The purpose of this task is to assign schedule line categories.
Procedure 1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Schedule Lines Assign Schedule Line Categories
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Divisões da remessa Atribuir categorias de divisões de remessa
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Assign Schedule Line Categories”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. Make the following entries:
Item Category MRP Type Prop.sched. line categ. Man.sched. line categ.
KBNB E1 E0KBNB ND E0KBNB VB E0KBNB VM E0KBNB VV E0KENB C1 C0KENB ND C0KENB VB C0
© SAP AGPage 113 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Item Category MRP Type Prop.sched. line categ. Man.sched. line categ.
KENB VM C0KENB VV C0LANB F3 F2LANB ND F2LANB VB F2LANB VM F2LANB VV F2LBNL F3 F2LBNL ND F2LBNL VB F2LBNL VM F2LBNL VV F2LPNB CPLPNB ND CNLPNB VB CVLPNB VM CVLPNB VV CVNLNB NNRBB DNRBN DNTBB CP CNTBB ND CNTBB P1 CP CNTBB P2 CP CNTBB VB CVTBB VM CVTBB VV CVTBD CPTBL E3 E2TBL ND E2TBL VB E2TBL VM E2TBL VV E2TBLL E3 E2TBLL ND E2TBLL VB E2TBLL VM E2TBLL VV E2
TBN CP CN
TBN ND CNTBN P1 CP CNTBN P2 CP CNTBN VB CVTBN VM CVTBN VV CVTBNL CP CNTBNL ND CNTBNL P1 CP CNTBNL P2 CP CNTBNL VB CVTBNL VM CV
© SAP AGPage 114 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Item Category MRP Type Prop.sched. line categ. Man.sched. line categ.
TBNL VV CVTBPS PPTBPS ND PNTBX CX
3.27.11 SD LOCALIZATION BRAZIL ASSIGN NF
3.27.11.1 Assign Nota Fiscal to Sales Order
Use
Here, you can assign nota fiscal types to sales document types.
Procedure1. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Country-specific Features Country-specific Features for Brazil Specify Nota Fiscal Category
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Características especiais do país Propriedades específicas de país - Brasil Determinar tipo nota fiscal
Transaction Code SPRO
2. Enter the following data:
Sales Doc Type NF Type
COB N1COB N1CRB N3CXB N3DLB N1DRB N2DXB N2KBB N1KEB N1LAB N5ORB N1RCM N1RCS N1REB N4ROB N5VDOR N1VEF N1VEFR N1
3.27.11.2 Maintain Sales Document Item Category
Use
© SAP AGPage 115 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
In this activity, you assign an item type and a main partner function (for example, ship-to party) to a combination of sales order type and item category.
You can also assign SD tax codes and specify whether the system is to calculate statistically the ICMS and IPI taxes.
Procedure1. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG MenuSales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Country-specific Features Country-specific Features for Brazil Maintain Sales Document Item Category
IMG MenuVendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Características especiais do país Propriedades específicas de país – Brasil Atualizar ctg.item doc.vendas
Transaction Code SPRO
Enter the following data:
Sales Doc
Item categ
NF item type
NF CFOP
Main Partner
Tax code
ICMS stat
ICMS law
IPI stat IPI Law
ISS law
Cofins law
PIS law
3rd party
COB LPNB 1 RE IC0 IP0 COB TBB 1 RE COB TBLL 21 RE C0 IC4 X IP1 CRB G2N 1 RE IC0 IP0 CRB G2W 1 RE IC0 IP0 CXB TBB 1 RE CXB TBD 1 RE I9 IC0 IP0 CXB TBN 1 RE IC0 IP0 DLB L2N 1 RE IC0 IP0 DLB L2W 1 RE DLB NLC 2 RE IC0 IP0 DLB NLNB 1 RE DRB L2N 1 RE IC0 IP0 DRB L2W 1 RE IC0 IP0 DXB L2N 1 RE DXB L2W 1 RE DXB TBB 1 RE IC0 IP0 DXB TBD 1 RE I9 IC0 IP0 DXB TBN 1 RE IC0 IP0 KBB KBNB 52 RE IC0 IP0 KEB KENB 51 RE I3 X IC4 X IP1 LAB LANB 21 RE C0 IC4 X IP1 ORB TANN 1 RE IC0 IP0 ORB TAPS 1 RE IC0 IP0 ORB TBB 1 RE I3 IC0 IP0 ORB TBD YS 2 RE Z9 IC0 IP0 IS0 C01 P01 ORB TBLL 21 RE C0 IC4 X IP1 ORB TBN 1 RE I3 IC0 IP0 ORB TBX 1 RE RCM TBB 63 WE I0 X X RCM TBLL 21 WE I0 X RCM TBNL 63 WE I0 X X
© SAP AGPage 116 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Sales Doc
Item categ
NF item type
NF CFOP
Main Partner
Tax code
ICMS stat
ICMS law
IPI stat IPI Law
ISS law
Cofins law
PIS law
3rd party
RCS L2N 62 WE I0 RCS RBB 62 RE I3 IC0 IP0 REB LBNL 21 RE C0 X REB RBB 1 RE REB RBN 1 RE REB RENN 1 RE ROB LBNL 21 RE C0 X IP1 ROB RBB 1 RE ROB RBN 1 RE ROB RENN 1 RE VDOR TBS 61 WE VEF L2N 41 RE I3 X IC4 IP0 VEFR TBB 42 WE I0 IC0 X IP1 VEFR TBN 42 WE IC0 X IP1
3.27.11.3 Maintain Billing Types
Use
In this activity, you specify:
Which billing types the system is to create a nota fiscal for
Which partner functions and which manual texts appear in the nota fiscal
Procedure1. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG Menu IMG Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Country-specific Features Country-specific Features for Brazil Maintain Billing Types
Menu IMG
IMG Vendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Características especiais do país Propriedades específicas de país – Brasil Atualizar tipos documento de faturamento
Transaction Code SPRO
Enter the following data:
Billing Type NF relevance
Main partner id
Text id header
Counter header text
Text id lines
Counter text lines
F2B X WE 4 4FA X RE 4 4FAR X WE 4 4FC X RE 4 4FCR X WE 4 4FST X WE 4 4FTB X WE 4 4G2B X WE 4 4
© SAP AGPage 117 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
L2B X RE 4 4REB X RE 4 4S1 X WE 4 4YIV X RE 4 4
3.27.11.4 Maintain Billing Document Item Category
Use
Here, you can define whether a combination of billing type and sales item category is nota fiscal relevant.
Procedure1. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Country-specific Features Country-specific Features for Brazil Maintain Billing Document Item Category
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Características especiais do país Propriedades específicas de país - Brasil Atualizar ctg.item de faturamento
Transaction Code SPRO
Enter the following data:
Billing Type Item Category NF relevanceF2B L2N XF2B LPNB XF2B TAN XF2B TANN XF2B TAPS XF2B TBB XF2B TBD XF2B TBL XF2B TBLL XF2B TBN XF2B TBNL XF2B TBS XFA L2N XFAR TBN XFC KENB XFCR KBNB XFST TBB XFST TBLL XFST TBNL XFTB NLC XFTB NLNB XG2B G2N XG2B G2W XL2B L2N XL2B L2W XREB LANB XREB LBNL XREB RBB X
© SAP AGPage 118 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Billing Type Item Category NF relevanceREB RBN XREB RENN XS1 G2N XS1 G2W XS1 KBNB XS1 KENB XS1 L2N XS1 L2W XS1 LPNB XS1 NLNB XS1 TBB XS1 TBD XS1 TBL XS1 TBLL XS1 TBN XS1 TBNL XS1 TBS X
3.27.11.5 Maintain Automatic Nota Fiscal Texts
Use
Here, you can assign nota fiscal header texts to sales order types.
Procedure1. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota Fiscal Sales and Distribution - Billing Documents Maintain Automatic Nota Fiscal Header Texts
Menu IMGComponentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Vendas e distribuição - documentos de faturamento Atualizar textos de cabeçalho nota fiscal automáticos
Transaction Code SPRO
Enter the following data:
Sales Doc Type Seq. no for text Text Argument
COB 10 Scheduling Agreement number: & SCHDAGR_NOCXB 10 Exchange Rate: & CURR_RATEDXB 10 Exchange Rate: & CURR_RATE
KEB 10Simples Faturamento de mercadoria em Consignação
ORB 10 Exchange Rate: & CURR_RATERCM 10 Mercadoria que lhe foi vendida por & BILL_TORCM 20 Conforme nota fiscal & NF_REFRCM 30 Do & DATE_REF
RCS 10Mercadoria que tem sido remetida ao destinatario
RCS 20 Nota fiscal acima referida RCS 30 O destinatário é & SHIP_TO
© SAP AGPage 119 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
REB 10 Order Reason: & ORD_REASONROB 10 Exchange Rate: & ORD_REASON
VDOR 10Goods will be sent directly by & on our expense VENDOR
VEF 10Sem valor para acompanhar o produto - Mercadoria p
VEFR 10Sem valor para acompanhar o produto - Mercadoria p
© SAP AGPage 120 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.27.11.6 Define Brazilian Tax Regions and Assign to Geograph. Regions
Use
Here, you can assign tax regions for the country.
Procedure2. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings BrazilDefine Brazilian Tax Regions and Assign to Geograph. Regions
Menu IMGContabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Configs.globais BrasilDefinir regiões fiscais do Brasil e atribuir regiões geográficas
Transaction Code SPRO
Enter the following data:
Country Tax region Tax Region Description
Region Description Tax-Free Zone
BR XE Foreign trade - EU X
BR XX Foreign trade - US X
BR ZF Zona Franca Manaus AM Amazon X
Choose Save.
3.27.12 SD Copy control for documents
3.27.12.1 Maintain Copy Control Billing to Sales Document
UseThe purpose of this activity is to define the copy control for the billing type to invoice the pallets not returned based on customers invoice.
Procedure1. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Maintain Copy Control for Sales Documents
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Atualizar controle de cópia para docs.vendas
Transaction Code VTAF
2. Select Copying Control: Billing Document to Sales Document and maintain data as follows on the screen Header Overview:
© SAP AGPage 121 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Target Sales Document Type Source Billing Type
CRB Credit Memo BR F2B Nota Fiscal
3. Select screen Header Details and make the following entries:
Description Value
Target sls doc. type CRB
Ref.billing doc.type F2B
Copying requirements 021
Data transfer VBAK 053
Data transfer VBKD 103
Data transfer VBPA 003
Copy item number X
Item
Target doc. type
Ref.bill. doc.tp.
Ref.
Item
Cat
Def.
Item
Cat
Copying requiremts
DataT
VBAP
DataT
Business
data
DataT
VBPA
Pric.
Type
Update
Doc
flow
Other fields.
CRB F2B LPNB G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CRB F2B TBLL LBNL 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CRB F2B TANN G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
CRB F2B TATX G2TX 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CRB F2B TBB G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
CRB F2B TBD G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CRB F2B TBN G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CRB F2B TBNL G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CRB F2B TBS G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CRB F2B TBX G2W 303 153 104 004 D X blank
4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 with the following data:
Target sls doc. type
DRB CXB DXB KEB RCS REB ROB VEFR
Ref.billing doc.type
F2B F2B F2B FCR FST F2B F2B FA
Copying requirements
021 021 021 021 021 021 021 021
Data transfer VBAK
053 053 053 053 053 053 053 053
Data transfer VBKD
103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103
Data transfer VBPA
003 003 003 003 003 003 003 003
© SAP AGPage 122 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Copy item number
X X X X X X X X
Item
Target doc. type
Ref.bill. doc.tp
Ref.
Item
Cat
Def.
Item
Cat
Copying requirents.
DataT
VBAP
DataT
Business
data
DataT
VBPA
Pric.
Type
Update
Doc
flow
Other fields.
CXB F2B LPNB G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CXB F2B TANN G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
CXB F2B TATX G2TX 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CXB F2B TBB G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
CXB F2B TBD G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CXB F2B TBN G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CXB F2B TBNL G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CXB F2B TBS G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
CXB F2B TBX G2W 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DRB F2B TBB G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
DRB F2B TBD G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DRB F2B TBN G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DRB F2B TBNL G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DRB F2B TBS G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DRB F2B TBX G2W 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DRB F2B TBLL LBNL 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DRB F2B LPNB G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
DRB F2B TANN G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DRB F2B TATX G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DXB F2B LPNB G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DXB F2B TANN G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
DXB F2B TATX G2TX 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DXB F2B TBB G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
DXB F2B TBD G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DXB F2B TBN G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DXB F2B TBNL G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DXB F2B TBS G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
DXB F2B TBX G2W 303 153 104 004 D X blank
KEB FCR KBNB KENB 303 153 104 004 B X blank
KEB FCR LPNB G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
KEB FCR TANN G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
KEB FCR TATX G2TX 303 153 104 004 D X blank
© SAP AGPage 123 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Target doc. type
Ref.bill. doc.tp
Ref.
Item
Cat
Def.
Item
Cat
Copying requirents.
DataT
VBAP
DataT
Business
data
DataT
VBPA
Pric.
Type
Update
Doc
flow
Other fields.
KEB FCR TBB G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
KEB FCR TBD G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
KEB FCR TBN G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
KEB FCR TBNL G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
KEB FCR TBS G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
KEB FCR TBX G2W 303 153 104 004 D X blank
RCS FST LPNB G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
RCS FST TANN G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
RCS FST TATX G2TX 303 153 104 004 D X blank
RCS FST TBB G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
RCS FST TBD G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
RCS FST TBN G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
RCS FST TBNL L2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
RCS FST TBS G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
RCS FST TBX G2W 303 153 104 004 D X blank
REB F2B LPNB G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
REB F2B TANN G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
REB F2B TATX G2TX 303 153 104 004 D X blank
REB F2B TBB RBB 302 153 104 004 D X blank
REB F2B TBD RBN 303 153 104 004 D X blank
REB F2B TBLL LBNL 303 153 104 004 D X blank
REB F2B TBN RBN 303 153 104 004 D X blank
REB F2B YB1 RBN 303 153 104 004 D X blank
REB F2B YB2 RBN 303 153 104 004 D X blank
REB F2B TBNL G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
REB F2B TBS G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
REB F2B TBX G2W 303 153 104 004 D X blank
ROB F2B L2N TBN 303 153 104 004 D X blank
ROB F2B LPNB G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
ROB F2B TANN G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
ROB F2B TATX G2TX 303 153 104 004 D X blank
ROB F2B TBB RBB 302 153 104 004 D X blank
ROB F2B TBD RBN 303 153 104 004 D X blank
ROB F2B YB1 RBN 303 153 104 004 D X blank
ROB F2B YB2 RBN 303 153 104 004 D X blank
© SAP AGPage 124 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Target doc. type
Ref.bill. doc.tp
Ref.
Item
Cat
Def.
Item
Cat
Copying requirents.
DataT
VBAP
DataT
Business
data
DataT
VBPA
Pric.
Type
Update
Doc
flow
Other fields.
ROB F2B TBLL LBNL 303 153 104 004 D X blank
ROB F2B TBN RBN 303 153 104 004 D X blank
ROB F2B TBNL G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
ROB F2B TBS G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
ROB F2B TBX G2W 303 153 104 004 D X blank
VEFR FA L2N TBN 303 153 104 004 B X blank
VEFR FA L2S TBLL 303 153 104 004 B X blank
VEFR FA LPNB G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
VEFR FA TANN G2N 302 153 104 004 D X blank
VEFR FA TATX G2TX 303 153 104 004 D X blank
VEFR FA TBB G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
VEFR FA TBD G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
VEFR FA TBN G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
VEFR FA TBNL G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
VEFR FA TBS G2N 303 153 104 004 D X blank
VEFR FA TBX G2W 303 153 104 004 D X blank
3.27.12.2 Maintain Copy Control Sales Document to Delivery
UseThe purpose of this activity is to define Copy Control of special sales order type to Delivery for pallets return.
Procedure1. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Copying Control Specify Copy Control for Delivery
Menu IMGLogistics Execution Expedição Controle de cópia Determinar controle de cópia para fornecimentos
Transaction Code VTLA
2. Maintain data as follows on the screen Header Overview:
Target Delivery Type Source Sales Document Type
LF Delivery ORB Standard Order BRA
3. Select screen Header Details and make the following entries:
Description Value
Target delivery type LF
© SAP AGPage 125 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Source sls doc. type ORB
Order requirements 001
Combination requirmt 051
Data transfer VBAK 001
4. Select the following Target and Source Sales Document and choose the Item Overview screen to entry additional Item Categories.
Target Delivery Document Source sls doc.
LF Outbound Delivery ORB Standard Order BRA
Item Category Description
TBN ST Item BR
Order requirements 101
Item data 101
Item Ext. System 0
Business data 2
Update flow X
Pos./neg. quantity +
5. Repeat steps 2 to 3 with the following data:
Target delivery type LF LF LF LF LR LR
Source sls doc. type KBB KEB RCM VEFR REB ROB
Order requirements 001 001 001 001 001 001
Combination requirmt 051 051 051 051 051 051
Data transfer VBAK 001 001 001 001 001 001
Item
Target Deliv. Doc.
Source doc.
Item Categ
Order requiremts
Item data
Item Ext.
System
Business data
Update flow
Pos./neg. quantity
LF KBB TBN 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KBB TBNL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KBB TBPS 101 110 0 0 X +
LF KBB TBX 102 101 0 2 X +
LF KBB KBNB 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KBB TANN 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KBB TATX 102 101 0 2 X +
LF KBB TBB 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KBB TBL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KBB TBLL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KEB KBNB 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KEB KENB 101 101 0 2 X +
© SAP AGPage 126 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Target Deliv. Doc.
Source doc.
Item Categ
Order requiremts
Item data
Item Ext.
System
Business data
Update flow
Pos./neg. quantity
LF KEB TANN 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KEB TATX 102 101 0 2 X +
LF KEB TBB 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KEB TBL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KEB TBLL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KEB TBN 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KEB TBNL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF KEB TBPS 101 110 0 0 X +
LF KEB TBX 102 101 0 2 X +
LF ORB TBB 101 101 0 2 X +
LF ORB KBNB 101 101 0 2 X +
LF ORB TANN 101 101 0 2 X +
LF ORB TATX 101 101 0 2 X +
LF ORB TBL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF ORB TBLL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF ORB TBNL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF ORB TBPS 101 110 0 0 X +
LF ORB TBX 102 101 0 2 X +
LF RCM KBNB 101 101 0 2 X +
LF RCM TANN 101 101 0 2 X +
LF RCM TATX 102 101 0 2 X +
LF RCM TBB 101 101 0 2 X +
LF RCM TBL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF RCM TBLL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF RCM TBN 101 101 0 2 X +
LF RCM TBNL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF RCM TBPS 101 110 0 0 X +
LF RCM TBX 102 101 0 2 X +
LR REB LANB 101 101 0 2 X +
LR REB LBNL 101 101 0 2 X +
LR REB RBB 101 101 0 2 X +
LR REB RBN 101 101 0 2 X +
LR REB RETX 102 101 0 2 X +
LR ROB LANB 101 101 0 2 X +
LR ROB LBNL 101 101 0 2 X +
LR ROB RBB 101 101 0 2 X +
© SAP AGPage 127 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Target Deliv. Doc.
Source doc.
Item Categ
Order requiremts
Item data
Item Ext.
System
Business data
Update flow
Pos./neg. quantity
LR ROB RBN 101 101 0 2 X +
LR ROB RETX 102 101 0 2 X +
LF VEFR KBNB 101 101 0 2 X +
LF VEFR TANN 101 101 0 2 X +
LF VEFR TATX 102 101 0 2 X +
LF VEFR TBB 101 101 0 2 X +
LF VEFR TBL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF VEFR TBLL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF VEFR TBN 101 101 0 2 X +
LF VEFR TBNL 101 101 0 2 X +
LF VEFR TBPS 101 110 0 0 X +
LF VEFR TBX 102 101 0 2 X +
3.27.12.3 Maintain Copy Control Sales Document to Billing
UseYou can specify for a particular billing type what document type is to be assigned to copied reference documents and which item categories are to be copied.
You must also make specifications for copying requirements and transferring data, as well as quantity and value updates in document flow. Do this for each copying procedure at header and item level on the appropriate detail screen.
Procedure1. Access the activity by the following navigation and note the corresponding BC-Set:
IMG MenuSales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Maintain Copying Control For Billing Documents
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Atualizar controle de cópia para docs.faturamento Controle de cópia: doc.vendas doc.faturamento
Transaction Code VTFA
2. On screen Modificar visão “Cabeçalho - síntese”, make the following entries:
Cabeçalho
Targ bil Source Sales Order
Copying requirements
Copy item number Other fields...
G2B CXB 001 X blank
L2B DXB 001 X blank
REB REB 001 X blank
REB ROB 001 X blank
G2B CRB 001 X blank
© SAP AGPage 128 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Targ bil Source Sales Order
Copying requirements
Copy item number Other fields...
L2B DRB 001 X blank
F2B ORB 001 X blank
F2B RCS 001 X blank
FA VEF 001 X blank
Item
Targ bil
Source
Sales Order
Item cat
Copying require
m
VBRK/
VBRP
Billing quanti
l
Pos./neg.
quantity
Pricing type
Other fields..
.
G2B CRB G2N 002 003 A + D blank
G2B CRB G2TX 002 002 A + D blank
G2B CRB G2W 002 002 A + D blank
L2B DRB G2N 002 002 A + D blank
L2B DRB G2TX 002 002 A + D blank
L2B DRB L2N 002 003 A + D blank
L2B DRB L2W 002 003 A + D blank
F2B ORB TBD 002 003 A + G blank
F2B ORB TBS 028 000 F + G blank
F2B RCS G2N 002 002 A + D blank
F2B RCS G2TX 002 002 A + D blank
F2B RCS L2N 002 002 A + D blank
F2B RCS L2W 002 002 A + D blank
FA VEF G2N 002 002 A + D blank
FA VEF L2N 002 003 A + D blank
FA VEF L2S 002 003 A + D blank
FA VEF L2W 002 002 A + D blank
G2B CXB G2N 002 003 A + D blank
G2B CXB G2TX 002 002 A + D blank
G2B CXB G2W 002 002 A + D blank
L2B DXB G2N 002 002 A + D blank
L2B DXB G2TX 002 002 A + D blank
L2B DXB L2N 002 003 A + D blank
L2B DXB L2W 002 002 A + D blank
REB REB LBNL 002 003 A + D blank
REB REB RBB 002 002 A + D blank
REB REB RBN 002 002 A + D blank
REB REB RET 002 002 A + D blank
© SAP AGPage 129 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Targ bil
Source
Sales Order
Item cat
Copying require
m
VBRK/
VBRP
Billing quanti
l
Pos./neg.
quantity
Pricing type
Other fields..
.
X
REB ROB LBNL 002 003 A + D blank
REB ROB RBB 002 002 A + D blank
REB ROB RBN 002 002 A + D blank
REB ROB RETX
002 002 A + D blank
3.27.12.4 Maintain Copy Control Delivery to Billing
UseIn this menu option, you define control data for the document flow of billing documents.
You can specify for a particular billing type what document type is to be assigned to copied reference documents and which item categories are to be copied.
You must also make specifications for copying requirements and transferring data, as well as quantity and value updates in document flow. Do this for each copying procedure at header and item level on the appropriate detail screen.
Procedure1. Access the activity by the following navigation and note the corresponding BC-Set:
IMG MenuSales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Maintain Copying Control For Billing Documents
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Atualizar controle de cópia para docs.faturamento Controle de cópia: nota de remessa -> doc.faturamento
Transaction Code VTFL
2. On screen Modificar visão “Cabeçalho - síntese”, make the following entries:
Cabeçalho
Target billing type
Source delivery
Copying requirements
Determ.export data
Assignment Number
Reference number
Copy item number
F2B LF 003 E A X
FAR LF 003 E A X
FC LF 003 E A X
FCR LF 003 E A X
REB LR 014 X
Item
© SAP AGPage 130 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Target billing type
Source delivery
Item Category
Copying requirements
Data VBRK/VBRP
Billing quantity
Pos./neg. quantity
Pricing type
Other fields...
F2B LF DLN 004 #001 B + B blank
© SAP AGPage 131 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Target billing type
Source delivery
Item Category
Copying requirements
Data VBRK/VBRP
Billing quantity
Pos./neg. quantity
Pricing type
Other fields...
F2B LF KENB 004 #001 B + G blank
F2B LF LPNB 004 #001 B + G blank
F2B LF TATX 004 #003 G + G blank
F2B LF TBB 004 #007 B + G blank
F2B LF TBN 004 #003 G + G blank
F2B LF TBX 004 #001 G + G blank
F2B LF TANN 004 #003 G + G blank
F2B LF TBNL 004 #007 B + G blank
F2B LF YBTA 004 #003 G + G blank
FAR LF DLN 004 #001 B + B blank
FAR LF KENB 004 #001 B + G blank
FAR LF LPNB 004 #001 B + G blank
FAR LF TANN 004 #001 B + G blank
FAR LF TATX 004 #001 B + G blank
FAR LF TBB 004 #007 B + G blank
FAR LF TBLL 004 #003 G + G blank
FAR LF TBN 004 #003 G + G blank
FAR LF TBNL 004 #007 B + G blank
FAR LF TBX 004 #001 G + G blank
FC LF DLN 004 #001 B + B blank
FC LF KENB 004 #003 G + G blank
FC LF LPNB 004 #001 B + G blank
FC LF TANN 004 #001 B + G blank
FC LF TATX 004 #001 B + G blank
FC LF TBB 004 #007 B + G blank
FC LF TBN 004 #007 B + G blank
FC LF TBNL 004 #007 B + G blank
FC LF TBX 004 #001 G + G blank
FCR LF DLN 004 #001 B + B blank
FCR LF KBNB 004 #003 G + G blank
FCR LF KENB 004 #001 B + G blank
FCR LF LPNB 004 #001 B + G blank
FCR LF TANN 004 #001 B + G blank
FCR LF TATX 004 #001 B + G blank
FCR LF TBB 004 #007 B + G blank
© SAP AGPage 132 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Target billing type
Source delivery
Item Category
Copying requirements
Data VBRK/VBRP
Billing quantity
Pos./neg. quantity
Pricing type
Other fields...
FCR LF TBN 004 #007 B + G blank
FCR LF TBNL 004 #007 B + G blank
FCR LF TBX 004 #001 G + G blank
F2B LF TBLL 004 #003 G + B blank
ResultAfter these configuration all prerequisites for Copying Control for Billing Document maintenance are completed.
3.27.12.5 Maintain Copy Control Sales Doc. to Sales Doc.
UseThe purpose of this activity is define control data for the document flow of Sales Document.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Maintain Copy Control for Sales Documents
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Atualizar controle de cópia para docs.vendas
Transaction Code VTAA
2. Copying Control: Sales Document to Sales Document
3. On the Change View “Header”: Overview screen, click on the New entries.
4. On the News Entries: Detail of Added Entries screen, and make the following entries:
Field name User action and values
Target SalesDocT ORB (Standard Order BRA)
From SalesDoc Typ YCO (Quotation BR)
DataT (1) 051
DataT (2) 101
DataT (3) 001
Copying requirement 001
Copy item number X
Complete reference Blank
5. Double click on Item folder. On the Change View “Item”: Overview screen, click on the New entries.
Field name User action and values
Item Category TBN (ST Item BR)
© SAP AGPage 133 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Field name User action and values
DataT (1) 151
DataT (2) 102
DataT (3) 002
FPLA 251
Copying requirements 301
Copy schedule lines X
Update document flow X
Pricing type A
3.28 SD TAXBRA – Localization Brazil
3.28.1 SD TAXBRA - LOCALIZATION BRAZIL - PART 1
3.28.1.1Field Catalog
UseBefore you create a new condition table, you should check whether the fields listed in the field catalog meet your requirements. If you require a field in pricing which is not intended for this usage in the standard system, you must enter it in the field catalog. You can only enter fields from tables KOMG, KOMK or KOMP.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define Condition Tables Create condition tables Conditions: Allowed fields
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Determinação do preço Definir tabelas de condições Condições: Campos permitidos
Transaction Code SPRO
2. Choose Enter.
3. On the Change View “Field Catalog (Pricing Sales/Distribution)”: Overview screen enter the following data:
FieldADDNR AKTNR ALAND ANZSN AUART AUART_SD AUBEL AUGRU AUPOS BELNR BEMOT BONUS
© SAP AGPage 134 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
BRSCH BWTAR BZIRK CHARG CITYC CMPGN_ID COUNC CUOBJ DELCO DOCTYP DYNKEY1 DYNKEY2 DYNKEY3 EAN11 GZOLX HIENR HIENR01 HIENR02 HIENR03 HIENR04 HIENR05 HIENR06 HIENR07 HIENR08 HIENR09 HIENR10 HIENR11 HIENR12 HIENR13 HIENR14 HIENR15 HWAER INCO1 INCO2 J_1ADTYP J_1AFITP J_1AGICD J_1AREGIO J_1ARFZ J_1ATXREL J_1BTXSDC J_1ISTCODEKBSTAT KDATU KDGRP KDKG1 KDKG2 KDKG3 KDKG4 KDKG5 KDKGR KEXCL_D KFRST KNRZE
© SAP AGPage 135 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
KNUMA KNUMA_AG KNUMA_PI KONDA KONDM KPOSN KSTAF KUNAG KUNNR KUNRE KUNRG KUNWE LAND1 LIFNR LLAND LOC_PR LOC_SE MATKL MATNR MBWNR MEINS MOGRU MTORG MTUSE MWSKZ OWNPR PLTYP PLTYP_P PMATN POSNR PRODH PRODH1 PRODH2 PRODH3 PROVG PSTLZ PWGGR REGIO RESWK REVKO REVTW RKE_WWRST SPART STEUC TAXBS TAXGROUP TAXK1 TAXK2 TAXK3 TAXK4 TAXK5 TAXK6 TAXK7 TAXK8
© SAP AGPage 136 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
TAXK9 TAXM1 TAXM2 TAXM3 TAXM4 TAXM5 TAXM6 TAXM7 TAXM8 TAXM9 TKONN TPOSN TXJCD TXREG_SF TXREG_ST UKONM UPMAT VARCOND VBELN VGBEL VGPOS VKAUS VKBUR VKGRP VKORG VKORGAU VRKME VSBED VTWEG WAERK WERKS WGHIE WGRU1 WGRU2 WKCOU WKCTY WKREG WMINR XSUBT YMVGR1 ZZDAMAGE
4. Choose Save.
ResultThe field catalog is now available.
3.28.1.2Define Sequence for SD Tax Code Determination
Use
In Sales and Distribution (SD), the system derives the tax code from either the item category or the customer-material info record.The purpose of this activity is to define the sequence in which the system accesses these sources.
© SAP AGPage 137 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Basic Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Define Sequence for SD Tax Code Determination
Menu IMG
Contabilidade financeira (novo) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Definir seqüência da determinação do cód.imposto SD
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “ Sequence for tax code determination”: Overview make the following entries:
Seq. in tax code determination Source for tax code determination
1 1 Customer Material Information2 0 Item Category Table
3. Choose Save.
4. The message “Conditions records saved” appears.
ResultThe sequence for tax code determination is now available.
3.28.1.3 Define Customer Groups for SubTrib Calculation
UseThis activity will define “Define Customer Groups for SubTrib Calculation”.
ProcedureCarry out the following steps:
5. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Basic Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Define Customer Groups for SubTrib Calculation
Menu IMG
Contabilidade financeira (novo) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Definir grupos de clientes para cálculo sub.trib.
Transaction Code SPRO
6. On the Change View “ Customer Groups for Substituição Tributária”: Overview make the following entries:
Sub. Trib. Group Name Sub. Trib. Ex.
001 Sub.Trib. Grupo 1002 Sub.Trib. Grupo 2003 Sub.Trib. Grupo 3X Sub.Trib. exempt X
© SAP AGPage 138 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.28.1.4Define Access Sequences
Use
I this IMG activity you define the access sequences for condition types that will be used in pricing procedures. The access sequence is a search strategy which the SAP System uses to search for condition records valid for a condition type.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Control Define Access Sequences
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “ Sequence for tax code determination”: Overview make the following entries:
BRCO: Brazil COFINS
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
5 346 0 X ALAND = BR
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
15 346 ALAND = BR
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 15
89 346 0 X ALAND = BR
DYNKEY1 X
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 89
© SAP AGPage 139 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
DIBR : Brazil Taxes Due
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
105 291 X ALAND = BR
J_1BTXSDC
KOMPJ_1BTXSDC
ICLW: Brazil COFINS
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
5 382 0 X ALAND = BR
DOCTYP 0
TXREG_SF
KOMP TXREG_SF
TXREG_ST
KOMP TXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP = 5
10 382 ALAND = BR
DOCTYP 0
TXREG_SF
KOMP TXREG_SF
TXREG_ST
KOMP TXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 KOMP STEUC
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP = 10
15 382 ALAND = BR
DOCTYP 0
TXREG_SF
KOMP TXREG_SF
TXREG_ST
KOMP TXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
© SAP AGPage 140 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
TAXGROUP = 15
89 382 ALAND = BR
DOCTYP 0
TXREG_SF
KOMP TXREG_SF
TXREG_ST
KOMP TXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP = 15
98 382 ALAND = BR
DOCTYP 0
TXREG_SF
KOMP TXREG_SF
TXREG_ST
KOMP TXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 = X
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP = 98
99 291 X ALAND = BR
MWST KOMK MWSKZ
ISS1: Brazil ISS at service provider
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
5 601 0 X ALAND = BR
TXJCD = KOMP LOC_PR
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
99 392 0 X ALAND = BR
© SAP AGPage 141 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
ISS2 : Brazil ISS wh. Serv. Provided
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
5 601 0 X ALAND = BR
TXJCD = KOMP LOC_SE
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
99 392 0 X ALAND = BR
BRWT : Brazil WHT
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
5 346 0 X ALAND = BR
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
DIBR : Brazil Taxes Due
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
105 291 X ALAND = BR
J_1BTXSDC
KOMPJ_1BTXSDC
IBRR – Brazil: 100% offset
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition
I/O
Doc.Struc.
Doc.Field
Constant
1 390 0 X ALAND = BR
© SAP AGPage 142 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
IBRX – Brazil Ext. Tax Det.
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
1 002 X ALAND KOMK ALAND
TAXK1 KOMK TAXK1
TAXM1 KOMP TAXM1
ICCB – BR: ICMS Offsetting Entry
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
10 349 0 X ALAND = BR
TXREG_ST KOMP TXREG_ST
MATNR KOMP MATNR
20 392 0 X ALAND = BR
ICBS – BR: ICMS Tax Base Val
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
1 341 X ALAND KOMK ALAND
TAXK3 KOMK TAXK3
5 382 0 X ALAND = BR
DOCTYP = 0
TXREG_SF KOMPTXREG_SF
TXREG_ST KOMPTXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
98 382 0 X ALAND = BR
DOCTYP = 0
TXREG_SF KOMPTXREG_SF
TXREG_ST KOMPTXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 = X
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 98
99 392 0 X ALAND = BR
© SAP AGPage 143 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
ICVA – BR: ICMS Tax Rates
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
5 382 0 X ALAND = BR
DOCTYP = 0
TXREG_SF KOMPTXREG_SF
TXREG_ST KOMPTXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
98 382 0 X ALAND = BR
DOCTYP = 0
TXREG_SF KOMPTXREG_SF
TXREG_ST KOMPTXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 = X
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 98
99 392 0 X ALAND = BR
ICXC – BR: Customer ICMS Exempt
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
1 341 0 X ALAND KOMK ALAND
TAXK3 KOMK TAXK3
IPBS – BR: IPI Tax Base Value
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
1 293 0 X ALAND = BR
TAXK2 KOMK TAXK2
© SAP AGPage 144 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
5 346 0 X ALAND = BR
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
97 346 0 X ALAND = BR
DYNKEY1 KOMP STEUC
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 97
99 392 0 X ALAND = BR
IPLW – BR: IPI Tax Laws
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
1 293 0 X ALAND = BR
TAXK2 KOMK TAXK2
5 346 0 X ALAND = BR
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
97 346 0 X ALAND = BR
DYNKEY1 KOMP STEUC
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 97
98 346 0 X ALAND = BR
DYNKEY1 = X
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 98
99 003 0 X ALAND = BR
MWSKZ KOMK MWSKZ
© SAP AGPage 145 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
IPVA – BR: IPI Tax Rates
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
1 293 0 X ALAND = BR
TAXK2 KOMK TAXK2
5 346 0 X ALAND = BR
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
98 346 0 X ALAND = BR
DYNKEY1 KOMP STEUC
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 98
99 392 0 X ALAND = BR
IPXC – BR: Customer IPI Exempt
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
1 293 0 X ALAND KOMK ALAND
TAXK2 KOMK TAXK2
ISTC – BR: ICMS Rates for Subtrib
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
5 382 0 X ALAND = BR
DOCTYP = 0
TXREG_SF KOMPTXREG_ST
TXREG_ST KOMPTXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
98 382 0 X ALAND = BR
DOCTYP = 0
TXREG_SF KOMPTXREG_ST
© SAP AGPage 146 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
TXREG_ST KOMPTXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 = X
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 98
99 392 0 X ALAND = BR
ISTI – BR: ICMS Rate for S.T
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
5 382 163 X ALAND = BR
DOCTYP = 0
TXREG_SF KOMPTXREG_ST
TXREG_ST KOMPTXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
ISTV – BR: Subtrib Surcharge
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
5 382 0 X ALAND = BR
TXREG_SF KOMPTXREG_SF
TXREG_ST KOMPTXREG_ST
XSUBT KOMK XSUBT
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
98 382 0 X ALAND = BR
TXREG_SF KOMPTXREG_SF
TXREG_ST KOMP TXREG_S
© SAP AGPage 147 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
T
XSUBT KOMK XSUBT
DYNKEY1 = X
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 98
ISVA – BR: ISS Tax Rates
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
1 121 0 X ALAND = BR
MATNR KOMP MATNR
5 347 0 X ALAND = BR
TXREG_SF KOMPTXREG_SF
TXREG_ST KOMPTXREG_ST
DYNKEY1 KOMP MATNR
DYNKEY2 = X
DYNKEY3 = X
TAXGROUP
= 5
99 392 0 X ALAND = BR
IZOF – Zona Franca
Step Tab. Req. Excl. Field Assignment
Condition I/O Doc.Struc. Doc.Field Constant
5 394 0 X ALAND = BR
TXREG_ST KOMP TXREG_ST
3. Choose Save.
3.28.2 SD TAXBRA - LOCALIZATION BRAZIL - PART 2
3.28.2.1Define And Assign Pricing Procedure
Use
In the pricing procedure, you define which condition types should be taken into account and in which sequence. During pricing, the SAP System automatically determines which pricing procedure is valid for a business transaction and it takes the condition types contained in it into account one after the other.
© SAP AGPage 148 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define And Assign Pricing Procedures Maintain Pricing Procedure
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir e atribuir esquemas de cálculoAtualizar Esquemas de Cálculo de Custos
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Procedures”: Overview Choose New Entry
3. Write the procedure name with RVABRA and choose Enter then enter the following data:
Step Cntr CTyp Description From To Man. Reqt SubTo Stat AltCTy AltCBV ActKy
001 00 000 000 000 X 000 000007 00 VA00 Variant Price 000 000 002 000 000008 00 EK01 Actual Costs 000 000 X 002 B 000 000010 01 PR00 Price 000 000 002 000 000010 01 ZPB0 Price w/o Taxes 000 000 002 000 000010 02 ZPB1 Price+ISS 000 000 002 000 000010 03 ZPB2 Price+PIS+COF 000 000 002 000 000010 04 ZPB3 Price+ISS+PIS+COF000 000 002 000 000045 00 000 000 000 000 000
50 0 RA01 % Disc.from Gross 8 000 002 000 ERS
50 1 RA00 % Discount from Net 8 000 002 000 ERS
50 2 RC00 Quantity Discount 8 000 002 000 ERS
50 3 RB00 Discount (Value) 8 000 002 000 ERS
50 4 YIPC Consign. Fill Up 45 002 ERS
51 YB01 Special Surcharge 002 4 ERS
60 Rebate Basis
198 00 000 000 000 000 000
199 DGTX General Taxability X 160
200 00 DICM Devido ICMS 000 000 000 X 000 160201 00 ICVA ICMS Tax Rate 000 000 000 X 000 160202 00 ICBS ICMS Tax Base 000 000 000 X 000 160203 00 ICOB BR: ICMS other
base000 000 000 X 000 160
204 00 IC0X BR: ICMS 0 excempt000 000 000 X 000 160205 00 I100 BR: ICMS
Convenio100000 000 000 X 000 160
206 00 ICLW BR: ICMS Law 000 000 000 X 000 160207 00 ISIC ICMS SF = ST 000 000 000 X 000 160208 00 ISTD ICMS Rate S.T.
spec.000 000 000 X 000 160
209 00 ICXC 000 000 000 X 000 160210 00 DIZF Zona Franca 000 000 000 X 000 160220 00 DICF Devido ICMS Freight 000 000 000 X 000 160221 00 ICFR BR: ICMS on freight 000 000 000 X 000 160230 00 DISI Devido ICMS s/IPI 000 000 000 X 000 160240 00 DIPI BR: Devido IPI 000 000 000 X 000 160
© SAP AGPage 149 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Step Cntr CTyp Description From To Man. Reqt SubTo Stat AltCTy AltCBV ActKy
241 00 IPVA IPI Tax Rate 000 000 000 X 000 160242 00 IPBS IPI Tax Base 000 000 000 X 000 160243 00 IPOB BR: IPI other base 000 000 000 X 000 160244 00 IPIP BR: IPI Pauta 000 000 000 X 000 160245 00 IP0X BR: IPI 0 excempt 000 000 000 X 000 160246 00 IPLW BR: IPI Law 000 000 000 X 000 160247 00 IPXC 000 000 000 X 000 160250 00 DCOF COFINS Due 000 000 000 X 000 160251 00 BCO1 COFINS Rate 000 000 000 X 000 160252 00 BCO2 COFINS Base 000 000 000 X 000 160253 00 BCOP COFINS Pauta
Amount000 000 000 X 000 000
255 00 DPIS PIS Due 000 000 000 X 000 160256 00 BPI1 PIS Rate 000 000 000 X 000 160257 00 BPI2 PIS Base 000 000 000 X 000 160258 00 BPIP PIS Pauta Amount 000 000 000 X 000 000260 00 DISS Devido ISS 000 000 000 X 000 160261 ISVA BR: ISS amount 160265 00 ISS New 2004 001 000 000 X 000 000266 00 ISVB ISS Rate at Provider 000 000 000 X 000 160267 00 ISVC ISS Base at Provider 000 000 000 X 000 160268 00 ISVD ISS Law at Provider 000 000 000 X 000 160269 ISVE IPI from SD X 160270 00 ISVF ISS Taxloc at Prov. 000 000 000 X 000 160271 00 ISVG ISS WHT at Prov. 000 000 000 X 000 160272 00 ISVH ISS Min.WHT at
Prov.000 000 000 X 000 160
273 00 ISVN ISS Rate at Service 000 000 000 X 000 160274 00 ISVO ISS Base at Service 000 000 000 X 000 160275 00 ISVP ISS Law at Service 000 000 000 X 000 160277 00 ISVR ISS Law at Service 000 000 000 X 000 160278 00 ISVS ISS Law at Service 000 000 000 X 000 160279 00 ISVT ISS Law at Service 000 000 000 X 000 160280 00 DSUB 000 000 000 X 000 160281 00 ISTS Brazil S.T. surcharg 000 000 000 X 000 160282 00 ISTT BR: Sub.Trib
SurType000 000 000 X 000 160
283 00 ISTM BR: Sub.Trib MinPric000 000 000 X 000 160284 00 ISTF BR: Sub.Trib FixPric 000 000 000 X 000 160285 00 ISTB Brazil S.T. red. bas 000 000 000 X 000 160286 00 IST2 BR: Sub.Trib Base 2 000 000 000 X 000 160287 00 ISTC S.T. ICMS BasRed 000 000 000 X 000 160288 00 ISTN Subtrib.Minpr.Factor 000 000 000 X 000 160289 00 ISTI S.T. Minp.Bef.Surch. 000 000 000 X 000 160290 00 DSUF 000 000 000 X 000 160291 BCPT X300 00 ICMI Price+Tax (for NF) 000 000 002 320 002 ERL310 00 001 000 000 X 000 000320 00 K004 Material 000 000 002 000 000 ERS321 00 K007 Customer Discount 000 000 002 000 000 ERS322 00 K005 Customer/Material 000 000 002 000 000 ERS325 00 YG31 Product Discount 000 000 002 000 000 YG1326 00 YBS1 Product Discount 000 000 002 000 000 YG1329 00 Customer/Material 320 328 000 000 000400 00 KF00 Freight 000 000 002 000 000 ERF
© SAP AGPage 150 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Step Cntr CTyp Description From To Man. Reqt SubTo Stat AltCTy AltCBV ActKy
599 00 AZWR Down Pay./Settlement
000 000 002 X 48 000
600 00 IBRX Brazil Tax Calc. 300 598 000 X 320 000610 00 BX10 BR ICMS Normal
Base000 000 000 X 320 000
612 00 BX11 BR ICMS Exclude Base
000 000 000 X 320 000
614 00 BX12 BR ICMS Other Base
000 000 000 X 320 000
616 00 BX13 BR ICMS Amount 000 000 000 1 320 000 MW2617 00 BXZF 000 000 X 000 1 320 000 MWS618 00 BX14 BR ICMS Freight
Base000 000 000 X 320 000
620 00 BX15 BRICMS Freight Amnt.
000 000 000 1 320 000 MW3
622 00 BX16 BR ICMS Rate 000 000 000 X 320 000624 00 BX20 BR IPI Normal Base 000 000 000 X 320 000626 00 BX21 BR IPI Exclude Base 000 000 000 X 320 000628 00 BX22 BR IPI Other Base 000 000 000 X 320 000630 00 BX23 BR IPI Amount 000 000 000 1 320 000 MW1632 00 BX24 BR IPI Offset Base 000 000 000 X 320 000634 00 BX25 BR IPI Offset
Amount630 630 000 X 320 000 BRJ
636 00 BX40 BR SubTrib Base 000 000 000 X 320 000638 00 BX41 BR SubTrib Amount 000 000 000 320 000 MW3640 00 BX42 BR SubTrib Fr. Base 000 000 000 X 320 000642 00 BX43 BR SubTrib Fr. Amnt 000 000 000 320 000 MW3644 00 BX44 BRSubTrib NF Rate 000 000 000 X 320 000645 BX45 BRSubTrib NF
Basred1X 320
646 00 BX50 BR ISS Base 000 000 000 X 320 000647 BX46 BRSubTrib NF
Basred2X 320
650 00 BXPA 000 000 000 1 320 000 MW1652 00 BX60 BR ISS Base Prov. 000 000 000 X 320 000653 00 BX61 BR ISS ExBase
Prov.000 000 000 X 320 000
654 00 BX64 BR ISS WT Base Prov
000 000 000 X 320 000
655 00 BX65 BR ISS WT ExBaseProv
000 000 000 X 320 000
656 00 BX6A BR ISS Base Serv 000 000 000 X 320 000657 00 BX6B BR ISS ExBase Serv000 000 000 X 320 000658 00 BX6E BR ISS WT Base
Serv000 000 000 X 320 000
659 00 BX6F BR ISS WT ExBaseServ
000 000 000 X 320 000
660 00 BX51 BR ISS Amount 000 000 000 1 320 000 MW4661 00 BX62 BR ISS Amount
Prov.000 000 000 1 320 000 MW4
662 00 BX63 BR ISS WTAmount Prov
000 000 000 1 320 000 MW4
663 00 BX6C BR ISS Amount Serv000 000 000 1 320 000 MW4664 00 BX6D BR ISS WTAmount
Serv000 000 000 1 320 000 MW4
665 00 BX6O BR ISS Offset TxIncl 660 664 000 1 000 000 ISS
© SAP AGPage 151 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Step Cntr CTyp Description From To Man. Reqt SubTo Stat AltCTy AltCBV ActKy
666 00 BX70 BR COFINS Base 000 000 000 X 320 000667 00 BX71 BR COFINS
ExclBase000 000 000 X 320 000
668 00 BX72 BR COFINS Amount 000 000 000 1 320 000 COF669 00 BX7P BR COFINS
PautaAmnt000 000 000 X 320 000
672 00 BX7O BR COFINS OffTxIncl
668 668 000 1 000 000 COF
675 00 BX80 BR PIS Base 000 000 000 X 320 000677 00 BX81 BR PIS Excl.Base 000 000 000 X 320 000679 00 BX82 BR PIS Amount 000 000 000 320 000 PIS680 00 BX8P BR PIS Pauta
Amount000 000 000 X 320 000
683 00 BX8O BR PIS Off.TxIncl 679 679 000 000 000 PIS700 00 *** Tax Code
Conditions ***001 000 000 000 000
702 00 IPI3 IPI from SD 001 000 X 000 X 000 000704 00 ICM3 ICMS from SD 001 000 X 000 X 000 000706 00 ICS3 Sub.Trib. from SD 001 000 X 000 X 000 000708 00 ISS3 ISS from SD 001 000 X 000 X 000 000710 00 ICZF ICMS Rev (Z.F.)-
STO001 000 X 000 X 000 000
712 00 IFR3 ICMS on freight SD 001 000 X 000 X 000 000714 00 IFS3 ICMS ST freight Out 001 000 X 000 X 000 000715 01 ISSA ISS at Provider 001 000 X 000 X 000 000715 02 ISSB ISS WHT at Provider 001 000 X 000 X 000 000715 03 ISSC ISS WHT Off. Prov. 001 000 X 000 X 000 000715 04 ISSD ISS WHT Again
Prov.001 000 X 000 X 000 000
715 05 ISSE ISS at Serv. Loc. 001 000 X 000 X 000 000715 06 ISSF ISS WHT at
Serv.Loc.660 664 X 000 X 000 000 WK3
715 07 ISSG ISS WHT Off. SrvLoc
001 000 X 000 X 000 000
715 08 ISSH ISS WHT Again SrvLoc
001 000 X 000 X 000 000
719 00 ToTal Tax 702 718 000 000 000720 00 ICMO ICMS offset 616 000 000 000 000 BRI730 00 YIPI BR IPI Surcharge 630 630 ERL740 00 DIFF Rounding Off 000 000 013 016 004 ERS750 00 000 000 000 004 000800 00 SKTO Cash Discount 000 000 009 X 000 011810 00 VPRS Internal price 000 000 004 B X 000 000820 00 EK02 Calculated costs 000 000 X B X830 00 EK03 Calculated ship.cost X X899 00 WITHHOLDING
TAXES ON GROSS001 000 000 X 000 000
900 00 WGEC BR General WHT Code
000 000 164 X 000 000
901 00 WPIC BR PIS WHT Code 000 000 164 X 000 000902 00 WCOC BR COFINS WHT
Code000 000 164 X 000 000
903 00 WCSC BR CSLL WHT Code000 000 164 X 000 000904 00 WIRC BR IR WHT Code 000 000 164 X 000 000905 00 WISC BR ISS WHT Code 000 000 164 X 000 000
© SAP AGPage 152 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Step Cntr CTyp Description From To Man. Reqt SubTo Stat AltCTy AltCBV ActKy
906 00 IGW6 GeneralWHT Code accu
000 000 164 X 000 000
907 00 IPW6 PIS WHT Code accu 000 000 164 X 000 000908 ICW6 COFINS WHT Code
accu000 000 164 X 000 000
909 00 ISW6 CSLL WHT Code accu
000 000 164 X 000 000
910 00 IRW6 IR WHT Code accu 000 000 164 X 000 000911 00 BR ISS WHT Code 1 X912 00 DWHT WHT Due 000 000 000 X 000 160913 00 BW51 WHT Acc. Flag 2 X 160914 00 BXWT BR WHT Base
Amount000 000 000 X 900 005
915 00 BXWA BR WHT Acc Base Amt
000 000 000 X 901 005
916 00 BW01 WHT Coll. Code Gen.
001 000 000 X 000 000
917 00 BW02 WHT Rate Gen. 000 000 000 X 000 005920 00 BW11 WHT Coll.Code PIS 001 000 000 X 000 000921 00 BW12 WHT Rate PIS 000 000 000 000 005925 00 BW21 WHT Coll.Code
COFINS001 000 000 X 000 000
926 00 BW22 WHT Rate COFINS 000 000 000 000 005930 00 BW31 WHT Coll.Code
CSLL001 000 000 X 000 000
931 00 BW32 WHT Rate CSLL 000 000 000 X 000 005935 00 BW41 WHT Coll.Code IR 001 000 000 X 000 000936 00 BW42 WHT Rate IR 000 000 000 000 005940 00 IGEW General WHT 916 000 900 WG3
941 00 IGEQ General WHT - Accum.
916 000 901 WG5
942 00 BGEZ BR General WHT off 940 941 000 000 164 WG4
945 00 IPSW PIS WHT 921 000 000 900 000 WP3
946 00 IPSQ PIS WHT - Accum. 921 000 000 901 000 WP5
947 00 BPSZ BR PIS WHT Offset 945 946 000 000 164 WP4
950 00 ICOW COFINS WHT 926 000 000 900 000 WC3
951 00 ICOQ COFINS WHT - Accum.
926 000 901 000 WC5
953 00 BCOZ BR COFINS WHT offset
950 951 000 164 WC4
955 00 ICSW CSLL WHT 931 000 900 000 WS3
956 00 ICSQ CSLL WHT SD Offset
931 000 901 000 WS5
957 00 BCSZ BR CSLL WHT offset
955 956 000 164 WS4
960 00 IIRW IR WHT 916 000 900 000 WI3
961 00 IIRQ IR WHT SD - Accum.
936 000 901 000 WI5
© SAP AGPage 153 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Step Cntr CTyp Description From To Man. Reqt SubTo Stat AltCTy AltCBV ActKy
962 00 BIRZ BR IR WHT offset 960 961 000 164 WI4
990 00 R100 100% discount 600 600 055 000 028 ERS999 00 BI00 Dummy Non-
Statistic.001 000 X 000 X 000 000
4. Choose Save and then choose Back.
5. In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Maintain Pricing Procedures.
6. On the Change View “Procedures”: Overview screen, select the entry for procedure RVABRA and choose Copy As…
7. Overwrite the procedure name with YVABRA and choose Enter.
8. In the dialog box, choose copy all.
9. Choose Save and then choose Back.
10. On the Change View “Procedures”: Overview Choose New Entry
11. Write the procedure name with RVABR2 and choose Enter then enter the following data:
Step Cntr Ctyp Description From To Man. Reqt SubTo Stat AltCTy AltCBV ActKy
7 VA00 Variant Price
10 1 ZPB0 Price w/o Taxes
10 2 ZPB1 Price+ISS
10 3 ZPB2 Price+PIS+COF
10 4 ZPB3 Price+ISS+PIS+COF
40 1 RA00 % Discount from Net
40 2 RB00 Discount (Value)
40 3 RC00 Quantity Discount
40 4 RD00 Weight Discount
3.28.2.2Define Condition Types
Use
In this IMG activity you define the condition types that will be used in pricing procedures.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG MenuSales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Control Define Condition Types
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Funções básicas Determinação do preço Controle da determinação de preço Definir tipos de condição
© SAP AGPage 154 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “ Conditions:Condition Types”: Overview make the following entries:
Ctyp Name AcSq CalTy CdCat CCl RfCTy Rap
BI00 Dummy Non-Statistic. IBRX A D D IBRX V
BX10 BR ICMS Normal Base B 1 A
BX11 BR ICMS Exclude Base B 1 A
BX12 BR ICMS Other Base B 1 A
BX13 BR ICMS Amount IBRX B D D IBRX V
BX14 BR ICMS Freight Base B 1 A
BX15 BR ICMS Freight Amnt. IBRX B D D IBRX V
BX16 BR ICMS Rate B 1 A
BX20 BR IPI Normal Base B 1 A
BX21 BR IPI Exclude Base B 1 A
BX22 BR IPI Other Base B 1 A
BX23 BR IPI Amount IBRX B D D IBRX V
BX40 BR SubTrib Base B 1 A
BX41 BR SubTrib Amount IBRX B D D IBRX V
BX42 BR SubTrib Fr. Base B 1 A
BX43 BR SubTrib Fr. Amnt IBRX B D D IBRX V
BX44 BRSubTrib NF Rate B 1 A
BX50 BR ISS Base B 1 A
BX51 BR ISS Amount IBRX B D D IBRX V
BXPA BR IPI Pauta Amount B 1 A
BXZF BR ICMS Zona Franca IBRX A D D
DICF Devido ICMS Freight DIBR A D D
DICM Devido ICMS DIBR A D D
DIPI BR: Devido IPI DIBR A D D
DISI Devido ICMS s/IPI DIBR A D D
DISS Devido ISS DIBR A D D
DIZF Zona Franca IZOF A 1 D ICZF V
DSUB Devido Sub Trib DIBR A D D
DSUF Devido SubTrib Fr. DIBR A D D
IBRX Brazil tax calc. IBRX A 1 D
IC0X BR: ICMS 0 excempt DIBR A D D
ICBS ICMS Tax Base ICBS A D D
ICCB BR: ICMS comp.base ICCB A D D
ICCX BR: ICMS comp.excmpt ICCB A D D
ICFR BR: ICMS on freight ICVA A D D
ICLW BR: ICMS Law ICLW A D D
ICM3 ICMS from SD A 1 D
ICMI Price+Tax (for NF) C B
ICMO ICMS offset IBRR A H A
ICOB BR: ICMS other base ICVA A D D
ICOQ COFINS WHT - Accum. IBRX A D D IBRX V
ICS3 Sub.Trib. from SD A 1 D
ICSO ISS offset IBRR A H A
ICSQ CSLL WHT SD Offset IBRX A D D IBRX V
ICVA ICMS Tax Rate ICVA A D D
ICXC BR Cust ICMS Exempt ICXC A D A
ICZF ICMS Disc. Zona Fr. IZOF A 1 D
IFR3 ICMS on freight SD A 1 D
IFS3 ICMS ST freight SD A 1 D
© SAP AGPage 155 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Ctyp Name AcSq CalTy CdCat CCl RfCTy Rap
IP0X BR: IPI 0 excempt DIBR A D D
IPBS IPI Tax Base IPBS A D D
IPI3 IPI from SD A 1 D
IPIP BR: IPI Pauta IPVA A D D
IPLW BR: IPI Law IPLW A D D
IPOB BR: IPI other base IPVA A D D
IPVA IPI Tax Rate IPVA A D D
IPXC BR Cust IPI Exempt IPXC A D A
ISIC ICMS Rate SF=ST ISTC A D D ICVA V
ISS3 ISS from SD A 1 D
IST2 BR: Sub.Trib 2 ISTV A D D
ISTB Sub. Trib Base Value ISTV A D D
ISTC Subtrib. Base reduct ISTV A D D
ISTD ICMS Rate for S.T. ISTI A D D
ISTF BR: Sub.Trib FixPric ISTV C D D
ISTI S.T. Minp.Bef.Surch. ISTV A D D
ISTM BR: Sub.Trib MinPric ISTV C D D
ISTN Subtrib.Minpr.Factor ISTV A A
ISTS Subtrib Surcharge ISTV A D D
ISTT BR: Sub.Trib SurType ISTV A D D
ISVA BR: ISS amount ISVA A D D ICN3 COFINS from SD MWST A 1 D ICW3 COFINS Withholding TaxSD MWST A 1 D IGW3 General WHT SD MWST A 1 D IPS3 PIS Normal Tax MWST A 1 D IPSQ PIS WHT - Accum. IBRX A D D IBRX VIPW3 PIS WHT SD MWST A 1 D IRW3 IR Withholding TaxSD MWST A 1 D ISA3 ISS at Provider SD MWST A 1 D ISB3 ISS WHT at Provider SD MWST A 1 D ISE3 ISS at Service Loc SD MWST A 1 D ISF3 ISS WHT at Service Loc SD MWST A 1 D ISSA ISS at Provider MWST A 1 DISSB ISS WHT at Provider MWST A 1 DISSC ISS WHT Off. Prov. MWST A 1 DISSD ISS WHT Again Prov. MWST A 1 DISSE ISS at Serv.Loc. MWST A 1 DISSG ISS WHT Off. SrvLoc MWST A 1 DISSH ISS WHT Again SrvLoc MWST A 1 DISSF ISS WHT at Serv.Loc. IBRX A D D IBRX VICOW COFINS WHT IBRX A D D IBRX VIGEW General WHT IBRX A D D IBRX VIPSW PIS WHT IBRX A D D IBRX VIIRQ IR WHT SD - Accum. IBRX A D D IBRX VIIRW IR WHT IBRX A D D IBRX VICSW CSLL WHT IBRX A D D IBRX VISW3 CSLL Withholding Tax SD MWST A 1 D ICZ3 COFINS WHT SD Offset IBRR A 1 D ICMO VIGZ3 General WHT SD Offset IBRR A 1 D ICMO VIPZ3 PIS WHT SD Offset IBRR A 1 D ICMO VIRZ3 IR WHT SD Offset IBRR A 1 D ICMO VISZ3 CSLL WHT SD Offset IBRR A 1 D ICMO VICO2 COFINS Offset SD IBRR A A ICMO V
© SAP AGPage 156 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Ctyp Name AcSq CalTy CdCat CCl RfCTy RapIPS2 PIS Offset SD IBRR A A ICMO VBGEZ BR General WHT off IBRX A D D IBRX VBPSZ BR PIS WHT Offset IBRX A D D IBRX VBCOZ BR COFINS WHT offset IBRX A D D IBRX VBCSZ BR CSLL WHT offset IBRX A D D IBRX VBIRZ BR IR WHT offset IBRX A D D IBRX VICW4 COFINS WHT code IBRX A D D IBRX VIPW4 PIS WHT code IBRX A D D IBRX VISW4 CSLL WHT code IBRX A D D IBRX VIRW4 IR WHT code IBRX A D D IBRX VIGW4 General WHT code IBRX A D D IBRX VDCOF COFINS Due DIBR A D D DPIS PIS Due DIBR A D D DWHT WHT Due DIBR A D D BCO1 COFINS Rate BRCO A D D BCO2 COFINS Base BRCO A D D BCOP COFINS Pauta Amount BRCO C D D ISVB ISS Rate at Prov. ISS1 A D D ISVC ISS Base at Prov. ISS1 A D D ISVD ISS Law at Prov. ISS1 A D D ISVF ISS Taxloc at Prov. ISS1 A D D ISVG ISS WHT at Prov. ISS1 A D D ISVH ISS Min WHT at Prov. ISS1 B D D ISVN ISS Rate at Serv. ISS2 A D D ISVB VISVO ISS Base at Serv. ISS2 A D D ISVC VISVP ISS Law at Serv. ISS2 A D D ISVD VISVQ ISS Ins.Cal at Serv. ISS2 A D D ISVE VISVR ISS Taxloc at Serv. ISS2 A D D ISVF VISVS ISS WHT at Serv. ISS2 A D D ISVG VISVT ISS Min WHT at Serv. ISS2 B D D ISVH VBPI1 PIS Rate BRPI A D D BPI2 PIS Base BRPI A D D BPIP PIS Pauta Amount BRPI C D B BW01 WHT Coll.Code Gen. BRWT A D D BW02 WHT Rate Gen. BRWT A D D BW11 WHT Coll.Code PIS BRWT A D D BW12 WHT Rate PIS BRWT A D D BW21 WHT Coll.Code COFINS BRWT A D D BW22 WHT Rate COFINS BRWT A D D BW31 WHT Coll.Code CSLL BRWT A D D BW32 WHT Rate CSLL BRWT A D D BW41 WHT Coll.Code IR BRWT A D D BW42 WHT Rate IR BRWT A D D BX60 BR ISS Base Prov B 1 A BX61 BR ISS ExBase Prov B 1 A BX62 BR ISS Amount Prov B 1 A BX63 BR ISS WTAmount Prov B 1 A BX64 BR ISS WT Base Prov B 1 A BX65 BR ISS WT ExBas Prov B 1 A BX6A BR ISS Base Serv B 1 A BX6B BR ISS ExBase Serv B 1 A BX6C BR ISS Amount Serv B 1 A BX6D BR ISS WTAmount Serv B 1 A
© SAP AGPage 157 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Ctyp Name AcSq CalTy CdCat CCl RfCTy RapBX6E BR ISS WT Base Serv B 1 A BX6F BR ISS WT ExBas Serv B 1 A BX6O BR ISS Offset TxIncl IBRR A A ICMO VBX70 BR COFINS Base B 1 A BX71 BR COFINS Excl. Base B 1 A BX72 BR COFINS Amount IBRX B D D IBRX VBX7O BR COFINS Off.TxIncl IBRR A A ICMO VBX7P BR COFINS Pauta Amt. B 1 A BX80 BR PIS Base B 1 A BX81 BR PIS Excl. Base B 1 A BX82 BR PIS Amount IBRX B D D IBRX VBX8O BR PIS Off.TxIncl IBRR A A ICMO VBX8P BR PIS Pauta Amount B 1 A ZPB0 Price w/o Taxes PR00 C H B ZPB1 Price+ISS PR00 C H B ZPB2 Price+PIS+COF PR00 C H B ZPB3 Price+ISS+PIS+COF PR00 C H B YSEC Surcharge ext. Costs K004 A D A
DGTX General Taxability IBRX A D D IBRX VBX25 BR IPI offset mont. IBRR A H A ICMO VYIPC Consign. Fill Up A A
YIPI BR IPI Surcharge IBRR A A
WCOC BR COFINS WHT Code J1AG A D W
WCOF BR COFINS WHT Code IBRR A W
WCSC BR CSLL WHT Code J1AG A D W
WGEC BR General WHT Code J1AG A D W
WPIC BR PIS WHT Code J1AG A D W
WPIS BR PIS WHT Code IBRR A W
WIRC BR IR WHT Code J1AG A D W
WISC BR ISS WHT Code J1AG A D W
ICW5 COFINS WHT SD – Acc MWST A 1 D
IGW5 General WHT SD – Acc MWST A 1 D
IPW5 PIS WHT SD - Accum. MWST A 1 D
IRW5 IR WHT SD - Accum MWST A 1 D
ISW5 CSLL WHT SD - Accum. MWST A 1 D
ICW6 COFINS WHT Code accu J1AG A D W
IGW6 GeneralWHT Code accu J1AG A D W
IPW6 PIS WHT Code accu J1AG A D W
IRW6 IR WHT Code accu J1AG A D W
ISW6 CSLL WHT Code accu J1AG A D W
BW51 WHT Acc. Flag BRWT A D D
BXWA BR WHT Acc Base Amt DIBR A D D
BXWT BR WHT Base Amount DIBR A D DWHT V
3.28.3 SD TAXBRA - LOCALIZATION BRAZIL - PART 3
3.28.3.1Assign Condition Types to Internal Codes for Tax Conditions
In this IMG activity, you can assign condition types to internal codes for tax conditions.
Procedure
© SAP AGPage 158 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil Condition-Based Tax Calculation Assign Condition Types to Internal Codes for Tax Conditions
Menu IMG
Contabilidade financeiraConfiguração contabilidade financeiraIVABrasilCálculo de imposto baseado em condiçõesAtribuir tipos de condições a códs.internos para condições de impostos
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View Map “Internal Codes for Tax Conditions to Conditon Types”: Overview make the following entries:
Internal TC Code Application Condition TypeCALCULATE_INCL_2ND V IBRXCALCULATE_TAX V ICMICOFINSBASE V BCO2COFINSLAW TX BLCOCOFINSLAW VCOFINSPAUTA V BCOPCOFINSRATE V BCO1ICMSBASE V ICBSICMSCOMPBASE V ICCBICMSCOMPEXEMPT V ICCXICMSCONV100 V I100ICMSCUSTEXEMPT V ICXCICMSFREIGHT V ICFRICMSLAW V ICLWICMSNULLEXEMPT V IC0XICMSOTHER V ICOBICMSRATE V ICVAICMSRATE_INTRA V ISICICMSSUBTRIB V ISTDIPIBASE V IPBSIPICUSTEXEMPT V IPXCIPILAW V IPLWIPINULLEXEMPT V IP0XIPIOTHER V IPOBIPIPAUTA V IPIPIPIRATE V IPVAISSBASE_PR V ISVCISSBASE_SE V ISVOISSLAW_PR V ISVDISSLAW_SE V ISVPISSMINVALWT_PR V ISVHISSMINVALWT_SE V ISVTISSRATE V ISVAISSRATE_PR V ISVBISSRATE_SE V ISVNISSTAXRELLOC_PR V ISVFISSTAXRELLOC_SE V ISVRISSWITHHOLD_PR V ISVGISSWITHHOLD_SE V ISVSNF_COFINS_AMOUNT V BX72
© SAP AGPage 159 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Internal TC Code Application Condition TypeNF_COFINS_BASE V BX70NF_COFINS_EBAS V BX71NF_COFINS_OFFSET V BX7ONF_COFINS_PAUTA_RATE V BX7PNF_ICMS_AMOUNT V BX13NF_ICMS_EBAS V BX11NF_ICMS_FREIGHT_AMOUNT V BX15NF_ICMS_FREIGHT_BASE V BX14NF_ICMS_NBAS V BX10NF_ICMS_OBAS V BX12NF_ICMS_RATE V BX16NF_ICMS_ZONAFRANCA V BXZFNF_IPI_AMOUNT V BX23NF_IPI_EBAS V BX21NF_IPI_NBAS V BX20NF_IPI_OBAS V BX22NF_IPI_OFFSET_AMOUNT V BX25NF_IPI_OFFSET_BASE V BX24NF_IPI_PAUTA_RATE V BXPANF_ISS_AMOUNT V BX51NF_ISS_AMOUNT_PROV V BX62NF_ISS_AMOUNT_SERV V BX6CNF_ISS_BASE V BX50NF_ISS_EBAS_PROV V BX61NF_ISS_EBAS_SERV V BX6BNF_ISS_NBAS_PROV V BX60NF_ISS_NBAS_SERV V BX6ANF_ISS_OFFSETS V BX6ONF_ISS_WTAMOUNT_PROV V BX63NF_ISS_WTAMOUNT_SERV V BX6DNF_ISS_WT_EBAS_PROV V BX65NF_ISS_WT_EBAS_SERV V BX6FNF_ISS_WT_NBAS_PROV V BX64NF_ISS_WT_NBAS_SERV V BX6ENF_PIS_AMOUNT V BX82NF_PIS_BASE V BX80NF_PIS_EBAS V BX81NF_PIS_OFFSET V BX8ONF_PIS_PAUTA_RATE V BX8PNF_SUBTRIB_AMOUNT V BX41NF_SUBTRIB_BASE V BX40NF_SUBTRIB_NFRATE V BX44NF_SUB_FREIGHT_AMOUNT V BX43NF_SUB_FREIGHT_BASE V BX42PISBASE V BPI2PISLAW TX BLPIPISLAW VPISPAUTA V BPIPPISRATE V BPI1SUBTRIBBASE1 V ISTBSUBTRIBBASE2 V IST2SUBTRIBFIXPRICE V ISTFSUBTRIBICMS V ISTC
© SAP AGPage 160 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Internal TC Code Application Condition TypeSUBTRIBMINFACTOR V ISTNSUBTRIBMINPRICE V ISTMSUBTRIBSURCHARGE V ISTSSUBTRIBSURCHIN V ISTISUBTRIBSURTYPE V ISTTTAXFREEREGION V DIZFTXSDCCOFINS V DCOFTXSDCICMS V DICMTXSDCICMSFREIGHT V DICFTXSDCINDUS V DISITXSDCIPI V DIPITXSDCISS V DISSTXSDCPIS V DPISTXSDCSUBTRIB V DSUBTXSDCSUBTRIBFREIGHT V DSUFTXSDCWHT V DWHTTXSDTAXES V DGTXWHTCOLL_COFINS TX BW21WHTCOLL_COFINS V BW21WHTCOLL_CSLL TX BW31WHTCOLL_CSLL V BW31WHTCOLL_GEN TX BW01WHTCOLL_GEN V BW01WHTCOLL_IR TX BW41WHTCOLL_IR V BW41WHTCOLL_PIS TX BW11WHTCOLL_PIS V BW11WHTRATE_COFINS TX BW22WHTRATE_COFINS V BW22WHTRATE_CSLL TX BW32WHTRATE_CSLL V BW32WHTRATE_GEN TX BW02WHTRATE_GEN V BW02WHTRATE_IR TX BW42WHTRATE_IR V BW42WHTRATE_PIS TX BW12WHTRATE_PIS V BW12WHT_ACCUMULATION TX BW51WHT_ACCUMULATION V BW51WHT_ACTIVE_COFINS V WCOCWHT_ACTIVE_COFINS_ACC V ICW6WHT_ACTIVE_CSLL V WCSCWHT_ACTIVE_CSLL_ACC V ISW6WHT_ACTIVE_GEN V WGECWHT_ACTIVE_GEN_ACC V IGW6WHT_ACTIVE_IR V WIRCWHT_ACTIVE_IR_ACC V IRW6WHT_ACTIVE_PIS V WPICWHT_ACTIVE_PIS_ACC V IPW6
© SAP AGPage 161 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.28.3.2Assign Condition Tables to Tax Tables
Use
In this IMG activity, you assign condition tables to Brazilian tax tables.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil Condition-Based Tax Calculation Assign Condition Tables to Tax Tables
Menu IMGContabilidade financeira Configuração contabilidade financeira IVA Brasil Cálculo de imposto baseado em condições Atribuir tabelas de controle a tabelas de impostos
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “ Map Tax rate tables to Condition Tables”: Overview make the following entries:
Table Name Tax Group Cond. TableJ_1BTAXCODEV 0 3J_1BTREGX 0 394J_1BTXCI1 0 349J_1BTXCOF 0 346J_1BTXCOF 10 346J_1BTXCOF 15 346J_1BTXCOF 20 346J_1BTXCOF 25 346J_1BTXCOF 30 346J_1BTXCOF 89 346J_1BTXDEF 0 392J_1BTXIC1 0 382J_1BTXIC2 0 382J_1BTXIC3 15 382J_1BTXIC3 20 382J_1BTXIC3 25 382J_1BTXIC3 30 382J_1BTXIC3 89 382J_1BTXIP1 0 346J_1BTXIP2 0 346J_1BTXIP3 15 346J_1BTXIP3 20 346J_1BTXIP3 25 346J_1BTXIP3 30 346J_1BTXIP3 89 346J_1BTXIS1 0 121J_1BTXISS 10 601J_1BTXISS 15 601J_1BTXISS 20 601J_1BTXISS 25 601J_1BTXISS 30 601J_1BTXISS 89 601J_1BTXPIS 10 346
© SAP AGPage 162 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Table Name Tax Group Cond. TableJ_1BTXPIS 15 346J_1BTXPIS 20 346J_1BTXPIS 25 346J_1BTXPIS 30 346J_1BTXPIS 89 346J_1BTXSDC 0 291J_1BTXST1 0 348J_1BTXST2 0 348J_1BTXST3 15 348J_1BTXST3 20 348J_1BTXST3 25 348J_1BTXST3 30 348J_1BTXST3 89 348J_1BTXWITH 10 346J_1BTXWITH 15 346J_1BTXWITH 20 346J_1BTXWITH 25 346J_1BTXWITH 30 346J_1BTXWITH 89 346
3.28.3.3Assign Condition Type to Withholding Tax Type
Use
You only need to carry out the following activity if you are implementing FI together with SD. Assign the corresponding withholding tax condition types to all withholding tax types.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Calculation Withholding Tax Type Assign Condition Type to Withholding Tax Type
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira Configuração contabilidade financeira IVA Brasil Cálculo de imposto baseado em condições Atribuir tabelas de controle a tabelas de impostos
Transaction Code SPRO
Country Key = BR
On the Change View “ Withholding tax types: condition type”: Overview make the following entries:
WHT Type Name Condition Type
CP COFINS at Payment WCOC
PP PIS at Payment WPIC
SP CSLL at Payment WCSC
RP IR at Payment WIRC
GP General WHT (PIS/COF/CSLL/IR) at Payment
WGEC
CA Cofins no pagamento - Acumulado ICW6
© SAP AGPage 163 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
WHT Type Name Condition Type
GA General WHT Payment - Acumulado IGW6
PA PIS no pagamento - Acumulado IPW6
RA IR at Payment (Accu) IRW6
SA CSLL no Pagamento - Acumulado ISW6
IC IRRF for natural persons (CPF)
IF Funrural
IN INSS
IP FCPS
IR IRRF for companies
IS ISS
IW ISS WHT WISC
XX Cofins no pagamento - Acumulado
3.28.3.4Tax Codes SD
Use
In this IMG activity, you maintain special tax codes for Brazilian tax processing in Sales and Distribution (SD). When you enter a sales order, you need to enter the SD tax code per line item, which the system uses to determine which taxes are to be calculated using which calculation rules.
Procedure1.Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG MenuFinancial Accounting Financial Accounting Basic Settings Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Define SD Tax Codes
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira (novo) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Definir código de imposto SD
Transaction Code SPRO
Country Key = BR
On the Change View “SD: Tax Codes”: Overview make the following entries:
Tax Code DescriptionB1 Stock Transfer for sub. trib.C0 Consumption: No TaxC1 Consumption: ICMSC2 Consumption: ICMS+S.T.+ICMS Compl.C3 Consumption:ICMS+IPIC4 Consumption:ICMS+IPI+S.T.C5 Consumption:IPICT Stock Transfer for consumptionI0 Industrialization:No TaxI1 Industrialization:ICMSI2 Industrialization: ICMS + S.T.I3 Industrialization:ICMS+IPII4 Industrialization: ICMS + IPI + S.T.
© SAP AGPage 164 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Tax Code DescriptionI5 Industrialization:IPII9 ServicesW0 Consumption: No TaxW1 Consumption: ICMSW2 Consumption: ICMS + S.T.W3 Consumption: ICMS + IPIW4 Consumption: ICMS + IPI + S.T.W5 Consumption: IPIYG Industrialization: ICMS + IPIZ0 Industrialization: No TaxZ1 Industrialization: ICMSZ2 Industrialization: ICMS + S.T.Z3 Industrialization: ICMS + IPIZ4 Industrialization: ICMS + IPI + S.T.Z5 Industrialization: IPIZ9 Services
On the Change View “SD: Tax Codes”:Details make the following entries:
Tax Code Ind ConsCalc ICMS
Calc IPI
Calc Sub Trib
Calc ISS
Calc ICMS on frei
Calc ST on frei
Calc PIS
Calc COFINS
Calc WHT
ICMS-exempt
IPI exempt
B1 X X X X
C0 X
C1 X X X X X
C2 X X X X X X
C3 X X X X X X
C4 X X X X X X X
C5 X X X X X
CT X X X
I0 X
I1 X X X X X
I2 X X X X X X
I3 X X X X X X
I4 X X X X X X X
I5 X X X X X
I9 X X X X X
W0 X X X
W1 X X
W2 X X X
W3 X X X
W4 X X X X
W5 X X X X X
YG X X X X X
Z0 X
Z1 X X
Z2 X X X
Z3 X X X
Z4 X X X X
Z5 X X
Z9 X X X
© SAP AGPage 165 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.28.3.5Tax Codes MM/FI
Use
In this IMG activity, you maintain the tax codes used for calculating Brazilian taxes in Financial Accounting (FI) and Materials Management (MM).
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG MenuFinancial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Basic Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Define FI/MM Tax Codes
Menu IMGContabilidade financeira (novo) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Definir código de imposto FI/MM
Transaction Code SPRO
On the Determine Work Area:Entry screen entry the value TAXBRA
On the Change View “ MaintainTax Codes”: Overview make the following entriesTax Code
Description Typ Usage Service
ICMS Text
IPI Text
ICMS ex.
IPI ex.
TC at GR
SD TC
A0 Out. Indust.: ICMS Outp. Tax Prod./Sales IC4 IP1 I0 I0
A1 Out. Indust.: ICMS Outp. Tax Prod./Sales IC0 IP1 I1 I1
A3Out. Indust.: ICMS + IPI Outp. Tax Prod./Sales IC0 IP0 I3 I3
C0 In. Cons.: No tax Inp. Tax Consumpt. IC4 IP1
C1In. Cons.: ICMS + CompICMS Inp. Tax Consumpt. IC0 IP1
C2In. Consumption: ICMS + CompICMS + S.T. Inp. Tax Consumpt. IC0 IP1
C3In. Cons.: ICMS + CompICMS + IPI Inp. Tax Consumpt. IC0 IP0
C4In. Cons.: ICMS + CompICMS + S.T. + IPI Inp. Tax Consumpt. IC0 IP0
C5 In. Cons.: IPI Inp. Tax Consumpt. IC4 IP2
I0 In. Indust.: No tax Inp. Tax Prod./Sales IC4 IP1
I1 In. Indust.: ICMS Inp. Tax Prod./Sales IC0 IP1
I2 In. Indust.: ICMS + S.T. Inp. Tax Prod./Sales IC1 IP1
I3 In. Indust.: ICMS + IPI Inp. Tax Prod./Sales IC0 IP0
I4In. Indust.: ICMS + S.T. + IPI Inp. Tax Prod./Sales IC1 IP1
I5 In. Indust.: IPI Inp. Tax Prod./Sales IC4 IP0
I6In. Indust.: ICMS + IPI: Reselling Inp. Tax Prod./Sales IC0 IP0
I7In. Indust.: ICMS + S.T. + IPI: Reselling Inp. Tax Prod./Sales IC0 IP0
I9 In. ISS Inp. Tax X ISS ISS
S0 Output SD tax: No tax Outp. Tax Prod./Sales IC4 IP1
SDOutput SD tax: ICMS/IPI/Sub.Trib. Outp. Tax Prod./Sales IC1 IP0
SEOutput SD: Tax exempt transactions Outp. Tax Prod./Sales IC4 IP1
SI Output SD tax: ISS Outp. Tax ISS ISS
SZOutput SD tax: ICMS Zona Franca Outp. Tax Prod./Sales IC1 IP0
Y1Industrialization: Only ICMS-PIS/COFINS Inp. Tax Prod./Sales IC0 IP1
© SAP AGPage 166 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
deductible
Y3
Industrialization: ICMS/IPI/PIS/COFINS deductible Inp. Tax Prod./Sales IC0 IP0
Z1
Industrialization: ICMS-PIS/COFINS non deductible Inp. Tax Prod./Sales IC0 IP1
Z3
Industrialization: ICMS/IPI/PIS/COFINS deduct Inp. Tax Prod./Sales IC0 IP0
3.28.3.6Define Official Collection Codes
Use
In this IMG activity, you define official collection codes for calculating withholding tax in Brazil.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG MenuFinancial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Calculation Brazil Define Official Collection Codes
Menu IMGContabilidade financeira Configuração contabilidade financeira Imposto retido na fonte (IRF) Imposto retido na fonte ampliado Cálculo Brasil Definir chaves de cobrança oficiais
Transaction Code SPRO
Country Key = BR
On the Change View “ Define Withholding Tax Key”: Overview make the following entries:
Official code Description5952 PIS / COFINS / CSLL 4,65%5960 COFINS 3,00%5979 PIS 0,65%5987 CSLL 1,00%6228 CSLL6230 PIS6243 COFINS6256 IR1708 IR
3.28.3.7Map SD Tax Values to Nota Fiscal Fields
Use
In this IMG activity, you map SD tax values to nota fiscal fields.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil Condition-Based Tax Calculation Map SD Tax Values to Nota Fiscal Fields
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira Configuração contabilidade financeira IVA Configurações globais Brasil Cálculo de imposto baseado em condições Mapear valores fiscais SD para campos
© SAP AGPage 167 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
da Nota Fiscal
Transaction Code SPRO
2. Usage = A, Application = V and Pricing Procedure = RVABRA
3. On the Change View “ SD Tax Conditions in Nota Fiscal fields”: Overview make the following entries:
TxTy Tax Rate
Map Pauta Rate
Map Tax Amount
Map Total Base
Map Tax Base
Map Ex. Base
Map Other Base
Map WHT Code
ICON BCO1 1 BX7P 0 BX72 0 BX70 0 BX70 0 0 0
ICOW BW22 1 0 ICOW 0 BXWT 0 BXWT 0 0 0 BW21
ICSW BW32 1 0 ICSW 0 BXWT 0 BXWT 0 0 0 BW31
IGEW BW02 1 0 IGEW 0 BXWT 0 BXWT 0 0 0 BW01
IIRW BW42 1 0 IIRW 0 BXWT 0 BXWT 0 0 0 BW41
IPSN BPI1 1 BX8P 0 BX82 0 BX80 0 BX80 0 0 0
IPSW BW12 1 0 IPSW 0 BXWT 0 BXWT 0 0 0 BW11
ISSA ISVB 1 0 BX62 0 BX60 0 BX60 0 BX61 0 0
ISSB ISVB 1 0 BX63 0 BX64 0 BX64 0 BX65 0 0
ISSE ISVN 1 0 BX6C 0 BX6A 0 BX6A 0 BX6B 0 0
ISSF ISVN 1 0 BX6D 0 BX6E 0 BX6E 0 BX6F 0 0
ICM3 ICVA 1 0 BX13 0 BX10 0 BX10 0 BX11 0 BX12 0
ICS3 BX44 0 0 BX41 0 BX40 0 BX40 0 0 0
ICZF BX16 0 0 BXZF 0 0 0 BX11 0 BX12 0
IFR3 BX16 0 0 BX15 0 BX14 0 BX14 0 0 0
IFS3 BX44 0 0 BX43 0 BX42 0 BX42 0 0 0
IPI3 IPVA 1 BXPA 0 BX23 0 BX20 0 BX20 0 BX21 0 BX22 0
ISS3 ISVA 1 0 BX51 0 BX50 0 BX50 0 0 0
ICOQ BW22 1 0 ICOQ 0 BXWA 0 BXWA 0 BW21
ICSQ BW32 1 0 ICSQ 0 BXWA 0 BXWA 0 BW31
IGEQ BW02 1 0 IGEQ 0 BXWA 0 BXWA 0 BW01
IIRQ BW42 1 0 IIRQ 0 BXWA 0 BXWA 0 BW41
IPSQ BW12 1 0 IPSQ 0 BXWA 0 BXWA 0 BW11
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 for Pricing Procedure YVABRA.
3.28.3.8Special Conditions for Pricing
Use
In this IMG activity, you maintain special pricing conditions for use in Sales and Distribution (SD).
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
© SAP AGPage 168 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Country-specific Features Country-specific Features for Brazil Special Conditions For Pricing
Menu IMG Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Características especiais do país Propriedades específicas de país – Brasil Condições especiais de determinação de preço
Transaction Code SPRO
2. Usage = A, Application = V and Pricing Procedure = RVABRA
3. On the Change View “ SD AmountTransfer from pricing to Notas Fiscais”: Overview make the following entries:
Cond Type NF Value IPI excl ST Mod. ST freight
BXZF 1 Discount
ICMI 5 Value and Price
K004 1 Discount X
K005 1 Discount X
K007 1 Discount X
KF00 2 Freight X + ST base X
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 for Pricing Procedure YVABRA.
3.28.3.9Define Sequence for Tax Law Determination
UseHere you can define what is the access sequence for Tax Laws.
Procedure1. Access the activity by the following navigation and note the corresponding BC-Set:
IMG MenuFinancial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil Define Sequence for SD Tax Law Determination
Menu IMGContabilidade financeira (novo) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Configs.globais Brasil Definir seqüência da determinação da lei tributária SD
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On screen Change View “Sequence for tax law determination” , make the following entries:
Sequência na det. Lei fiscal
Fonte para determinação lei fiscal
1 0 Tax Exception Tables
© SAP AGPage 169 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Sequência na det. Lei fiscal
Fonte para determinação lei fiscal
2 1 Item Category Table
3 2 Customer Master
3.28.4 SALES DOCUMENTS BRAZILIAN LOCALIZATION
3.28.4.1Assign Output Determination Procedures
Use
In this menu option, assign output determination procedures to the documents.
You may also specify an output type which is to be displayed when the relevant document is displayed or changed.
Procedure1. Access the activity by the following navigation and note the corresponding BC-Set:
IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Output Control Output Determination Output Determination Using the Condition Technique Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents Assign Output Determination Procedures
Menu IMG
Vendas e distribuição Funções básicas Controle de mensagens Determinação de mensagens Determinação de mensagem via técnica de condições Atualizar determinação de mensagens para docs.vendas Atribuir esquema de mensagem
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On screen Change View “Sales Document Types – Output Determination”:Overview, make the following entries:
Doc Type Application Output Proced Output TypeCOB V1 V07000 LP00CRB V1 V10000 BA00CXB V1 DLB DRB V1 V10000 BA00DXB KBB V1 V10000 BA00KEB V1 V10000 BA00LAB V1 V10000 BA00ORB V1 V10000 BA00RCM V1 V10000 BA00RCS V1 V10000 BA00REB V1 ROB V1 VDOR V1 V10000 BA00VEF V1 V10000 BA00VEFR V1 V10000 BA00YCO V1 V06000 AN00
© SAP AGPage 170 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.28.4.2Define and Assign Account Keys
Use
You define your account keys in this menu option and allocate them to the condition types in the pricing procedures.
Procedure1. Access the activity by the following navigation and note the corresponding BC-Set:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment/Costing Revenue Account Determination Define And Assign Account Keys
Menu IMG Vendas e Distribuição Funções Básicas Class.contábil/cálculo de custos Det.conta de receita Definir e atribuir chave de conta
Transaction Code SPRO
2. Choose Definir chave de conta.
3. On screen Change View “Account Key“: Overview, make the following entries:
Chave de Conta Denominação
YCF Provisões Cofins
YPS Provisões PIS
ZDV Devolução
3.28.4.3Assign Document Procedure for Product Proposal to Sales Document
Use
In this IMG activity, you assign the document determination procedure for the product proposal to the individual sales document types.
Procedure 1. Access the activity by the following navigation and note the corresponding BC-Set:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Dynamic Product Proposal Assign Document Procedure for Product Proposal to Sales Document Types
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Funções básicas Proposta de produto dinâmica Atribuir esq.documentos p/prop.prod. aos tipos de documentos de vendas
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Modificar visão “Documentos de vendas: tipos – proposta de produto” screen, choose Entradas novas and enter the following data:
TpDV Denominação EsDocPp
CO Quotation A
© SAP AGPage 171 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
ORB Standard Order BR A
YCO Quotation BR A
3.28.4.4Define Industry Sector for Customers
Use
In this menu option, you define the industry sectors a customer can belong to.
Procedure 1. Access the activity by the following navigation and note the corresponding BC-Set:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Master Data Business Partners Customers Marketing Define Industry Sector For Customers
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Dados mestre Parceiro negócios Clientes Marketing Definir setor industrial do cliente
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Industry Keys”: Overview, choose New Entries and enter the following data:
Industry Description1 Wholesale2 Retail3 Industry
3.28.4.5Define Shipping Conditions by Sales Document Type
Use
In this menu option, you can specify a shipping condition for individual sales document types.
Procedure 1. Access the activity by the following navigation and note the corresponding BC-Set:
IMG Menu Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination Define Shipping Conditions by Sales Document Type
Menu IMGLogistics Execution Expedição Bases Determinação de local de expedição/dpto.entrada mercadorias Definir condição de expedição por tipo documento de vendas
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Sales Document Types – Shipping Conditions”: Overview, choose New Entries and enter the following data:
Doc Type Shipping Conditions
BV 02
KBB
© SAP AGPage 172 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Doc Type Shipping Conditions
KEB
LAB
RCM
RCS
REB
ROB
VDOR
VEF
VEFR
CRB
DRB
ORB 01
COB
CXB
DLB
DXB
3.28.5 Pricing Procedures: Determination in Sales Docs.
Use
You define the pricing procedures in this step. In addition, you assign the pricing procedures to the transactions by defining the following dependencies:
Customer Sales document type
Sales area
In the pricing procedure, you define which condition types should be taken into account and in which sequence. During pricing, the SAP System automatically determines which pricing procedure is valid for a business transaction and it takes the condition types contained in it into account one after the other.
Procedure 1. Access the activity by the following navigation and note the corresponding BC-Set:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Contracts Value Contract Define And Assign Pricing Procedure For Value Contract
Menu IMG Vendas e distribuição Venda Documentos de vendas Contratos Contrato em valor Definir e ordenar esquema de cálculo para contrato em valor
Transaction Code SPRO
© SAP AGPage 173 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
2. Choose the Assing Pricing Procedure option.
3. On the Change View “Pricing Procedure:Determination in Sales Docs”: Overview, enter the following data:
Sales Organ
Distr Chanel
Division Doc Pric Proc
Customer Pric Proc
Pricing Proced
Condition
1000 10 10 A 1 YVABRA PR00
1000 10 10 A 2 YVABRA PR00
1000 10 10 B 1 RVWIA1
1000 10 10 C 1 RVCA01
1000 10 10 C 2 RVCA02
1000 10 10 D 1 YVABRA PR00
1000 10 10 D 2 YVABRA PR00
1000 10 10 L 1 RVLB00 VPRS
1000 10 10 P 1 VPKPS1 PR00
1000 10 10 P 2 VPKPS1 PR00
1000 10 10 R 1 YVABRA EK01
1000 10 10 R 2 YVABRA EK01
1000 10 10 S 1 YVABRA PR00
1000 10 10 S 2 YVABRA PR00
1000 10 10 V 1 YVABRA EK01
1000 10 10 V 2 YVABRA EK01
1000 10 10 W 1 PSER02
1000 10 10 W 2 PSER02
1000 10 10 X 1 WMP001
1000 10 10 Y 1 WK0001 WK00
1000 10 10 Y 2 WK0001 WK00
1100 10 10 A 1 YVABRA PR00
3.28.6 Calculation Procedures for CBT Calculation
UseThe system needs to identify whether in the currently processed calculation procedure the tax calculation is condition-based or not. This is necessary to either call the classical, external tax calculation or the new tax calculation in condition value formula 320. For this reason, you specify the calculation procedure for CBT in the new IMG activity.
Procedure1. Access the activity as follows:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Basic Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil Condition-Based Tax Calculation Specify Calculation Procedures for Condition-Based Tax Calculation
© SAP AGPage 174 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira (novo) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Configs.globais Brasil Cálculo de imposto baseado em condições Indicar esquemas de cálculo p/cálculo de imposto baseado em condições
Transaction Code SPRO
2. Make the following entries:
Determine work area entry:
Usage Application
A V
Calculation Procedures for Condition Based Tax Calculation:
Procedure CBT Act. Description
YVABRA X Std Pricing – RVABRA – BR
3.28.7 Assign Business Area to Plant/Valuation Area and Division
Use
In this step you assign the plant / valuation area and division combination to a business area to enable automatic business area account assignment.
Procedure1. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG MenuEnterprise Structure Assignment Logistics - General Assign Business Area to Plant/Valuation Area and Division
Menu IMGEstrutura do empreendimento Atribuição Logística geral Atribuir centro/area avaliação – setor atividade divisão
Transaction Code SPRO
2. Click in the button “Plant/valuation area – division” :
3. Click in the button “New Entries” and create the following entries:
Plnt Dv Name BusA Description
1000 10 Product Division 10
1100 10 Product Division 10
4. Save your settings.
3.28.8 Define Wich Taxes are included in SD Price Conditions
Use
In this IMG activity, you define which taxes are included in which prices.
© SAP AGPage 175 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Procedure1. Access the activity by the following navigation and note the corresponding BC-Set:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil Define wich taxes are included in SD price conditions
Menu IMG
Contabilidade financeira (novo) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Configs.globais Brasil Define quais impostos estão contidos em condições p/determinação preços SD
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On screen “Determine Work Area: Entry” , make the following entries: Application = V and Pricing Procedure = YVABRA
3. On screen Change View “Groups of Brazilian Taxes in SD Price Conditions” , make the following entries:
C Type GroupPR00 COFIPR00 ISSPPR00 ISSSPR00 PISZPB1 ISSPZPB1 ISSSZPB2 COFIZPB2 PISZPB3 COFIZPB3 ISSPZPB3 ISSSZPB3 PIS
3.28.9 Assign Nota Fiscal to Sales Order
Use
Here, you can assign nota fiscal types to sales document types.
Procedure1. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Country-specific Features Country-specific Features for Brazil Specify Nota Fiscal Category
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Características especiais do país Propriedades específicas de país - Brasil Determinar tipo nota fiscal
Transaction Code SPRO
2. Enter the following data:
Sales Doc Type NF Type
YCO N1
© SAP AGPage 176 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.28.10 DEFINE TAX RELEVANCY OF MASTER RECORDS
3.28.10.1 DEFINE TAX RELEVANCY OF MASTER RECORDS - Customer
Use
Here, you can assign nota fiscal types to sales document types.
Procedure1. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Taxes Define Tax Relevancy Of Master Records
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Funções básicas Impostos Definir relevância para impostos dos registros mestre
Transaction Code SPRO
2. Choose Customer Taxes.
3. Enter the following data:
Tax category Tax classification Description
IBRX 0 Not taxable
IBRX 1 Normal taxes
IBRX 2 Zona Franca - ICMS
3.28.10.2 DEFINE TAX RELEVANCY OF MASTER RECORDS - Material
Use
Here, you can assign nota fiscal types to sales document types.
Procedure4. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Taxes Define Tax Relevancy Of Master Records
Menu IMGVendas e distribuição Funções básicas Impostos Definir relevância para impostos dos registros mestre
Transaction Code SPRO
5. Choose Material Taxes.
6. Enter the following data:
Tax category Tax classification Description
IBRX 1 IPI/ICMS/Sub.Trib.
IBRX 2 ISS
© SAP AGPage 177 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.29 MANUAL ACTIVITIES
3.29.1 Activation of Tax Codes
Use
With this step you will activate the Condition Types needed for each Tax Code configured by previous automated customizing.
Prerequisites
The Tax codes were created by previous activation steps.
Procedure
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu
IMG Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Access Tax Manager's Workplace
Menu IMGIMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Chamar Tax Administration Tool
Transaction Code J1BTAX
2. If the Country dialog box appears, select BR. If not, check if BR was already selected for this user (menu Tax Calculation -> Other Country)
3. On Tax Manager's Workplace screen, press button Maintain MM Tax codes (Shift + F4) and select procedure TAXBRA; press <Enter>.
4. Select the Tax code line to maintain (e.g.: A1), press button Maintain Tax code Conditions (Ctrl + F3).
5. Select the activation flag (first column) for each relevant condition for this Tax code (e.g.: IPI0, ICM3).
6. Go Back (F3) and Save (Ctrl + S).
7. Execute the steps 3 to 5 for each Tax code indicated below and respective Condition Types:
Tax Code Cond. Types
A0 ICM0, IPI0
A1 IPI0, ICM3
A3 IPI3, ICM3
C0 IPI0, ICM0
C1 IPI0, ICM2, ICOP, ICOX
C2 IPI0, ICM2, ICS2, ICOP, ICOX
© SAP AGPage 178 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
C3 IPI2, ICM2, ICOP, ICOX
C4 IPI2, ICM2, ICS2, ICOP, ICOX
C5 ICM0, IPI2
I0 IPI0, ICM0
I1 IPI0, ICM1
I2 IPI0, ICM1, ICS1
I3 IPI1, IPI4, ICM1
I4 IPI1, IPI4, ICM1, ICS1
I5 ICM0, IPI1, IPI4
I6 ICM1, IPI2
I7 ICM1, ICS1, IPI2
I9 ISS3
K5 IPI1, ICM1, IP1O, IC1O
K6 IP1C, IC1C
S0 IPI0, ICM0
SD IPI3, ICM3, ICS3
SE IPI0, ICM0
SI ISS3
SZ ICM3, ICS3, ICZF
Y1 IPI0, ICM1, ICOF, IPIS, ICOV, ICOS, ICOU, ICOA, IPSV, IPSS, IPSU, IPSA
Y3 IPI1, IPI4, ICM1, ICOF, IPIS, ICOV, ICOS, ICOU, ICOA, IPSV, IPSS, IPSU, IPSA
Z1 IPI0, ICM1, ICON, ICOO, IPSN, IPSO
Z3 IPI1, IPI4, ICM1, ICON, ICOO, IPSN, IPSO
3.29.2 Maintain Specific Tax Type ICMO
Use
With this activity you will check, and maintain if necessary, the tax type ICMO.
Procedure
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu
IMG Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Access Tax Manager's Workplace
Menu IMGIMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Chamar Tax Administration Tool
Transaction Code J1BTAX
© SAP AGPage 179 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
2. If the Country dialog box appears, select BR. If not, check if BR was already selected for this user (menu Tax Calculation -> Other Country)
3. Select the menu Condition Setup -> Tax Types.
4. On the Change View "Tax Types": Overview screen check if exist an entry for tax type ICMO (WARNING: this key ends with letter O and not number zero).
5. If the entry exists, select it and press Delete (Shift + F2). Save (Ctrl + S) your action.
6. On the Prompt for a Workbench request screen, accept the suggested for project activation or create a new one.
4 MASTER DATA3.1.1 Create Output Tax Record (IBRX)
UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain the condition records to determine the TAX Code in sales orders processing.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu SAP menu Logistics Sales and Distribution Master Data Conditions Select Using Condition Type VK11 - Create
Menu IMGMenu SAP Logística Vendas e distribuição Dados mestre
Condições Seleção via tipo de condição Criar
Transaction Code VK11
2. Enter IBRX in the condition type field in the Create Condition Records screen.
3. On the Create Brazil Tax Calc. Condition (IBRX) : Fast Entry make the following entries:
Country Cust Tax Class Mat. Tax Class Amount Tax Code
BR 0 1 0,000 S0BR 0 2 0,000 S0BR 1 1 100,000 SDBR 1 2 100,000 SIBR 2 1 100,000 SZBR 2 2 100,000 SI
3.1.2 Create Initial Tax Rates 100%
UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain the initial condition records for Brazil.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
Transaction Code VK15
© SAP AGPage 180 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
2. On the Create Condition Records screen make the following entries:
Cond. Type Table Country Amount
ICMO 390 BR 100-ICSO 390 BR 100-IPIC 390 BR 100IPIO 390 BR 100-
3. Note that the entries are is time-independent, meaning they are valid until 01/01/2999, for example.
4. Choose Save.
5. Choose Back
3.1.3 Create Initial Base Rates 100%
UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain the initial condition records for Brazil.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
Transaction Code VK15
2. On the Create Condition Records screen make the following entries:
Cond. Type Table Country Amount Valid From Valid To
ICBS 392 BR 100 01/01/2008 31/12/2999IPBS 392 BR 100 01/01/2008 31/12/2999
3. Choose Save.
4. Choose Back.
3.1.4 Create Initial Base Rates 100%
UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain the initial condition records for Brazil.
Procedure5. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
Transaction Code FV11
6. On the Create Condition Records screen make the following entries:
Cond. Type Country Amount Valid From Valid To
BXWT BR 100 01/01/2008 31/12/2999
BIC6 BR 100 01/01/2008 31/12/2999
7. Choose Save.
8. Choose Back
© SAP AGPage 181 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.1.5 Nota Fiscal Condition Records
UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain the Nota Fiscal Condition Records for Brazil.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
Transaction Code J1BG
2. On the Change Output – Condition Records : Nota Fiscal screen make the following entries, selecting Choose Condition Tables for Output Nota Fiscal key combination.
Output Type
Company Code
Business Place
Nota Fiscal Form
Output Device
Language Key
Nr. of messag
Print Immed
Release after output
NF01 1000 1000 NF01 LOCL PT 1 NF01 1000 1100 NF01 LOCL PT 1 NF02 1000 1000 NF02 LOCL PT 1 NF02 1000 1100 NF02 LOCL PT 1
3. Choose Save.
4. Choose Back
3.1.6 Create Initial PIS Tax Rate
UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain the condition record for PIS Tax Rate Brazil.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Access Tax Manager's Workplace
Menu IMG
Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Chamar Tax Administration Tool
Transaction Code J1BTAX
2. On the Tax Manager’s Work Place screen choose Maintain PIS Values option and entry the values:
Country Key Tax Group
BR 89
3. On the Change View “Tax Calculation:PIS” Overview screen entry the values:
Valid From Valid To Tax Rate Tax Base01.01.2005 31.12.2999 1,65 100
© SAP AGPage 182 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.1.7 Create Initial COFINS Tax Rate
UseThe purpose of this activity is to maintain the condition record for PIS Tax Rate Brazil.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu
IMG Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Access Tax Manager's Workplace
Menu IMG
IMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Chamar Tax Administration Tool
Transaction Code J1BTAX
2. On the Tax Manager’s Work Place screen choose Maintain COFINS Values option and entry the values:
Country Key Tax GroupBR 89
3. On the Change View “Tax Calculation:COFINS” Overview screen entry the values:
Valid From Valid To Tax Rate Tax Base01.01.2005 31.12.2999 7,60 100
© SAP AGPage 183 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
5 BRAZILIAN LOCALIZATION
5.1 Nota Fiscal Electronic (NF-e)
3.1.1 PurposeThis section of the configuration guide provides the information you need to set up the configuration of NF-e.
If you do not want to configure manually and prefer an automated installation process using the SAP Best Practices Installation Assistant and other tools, refer to the SAP Best Practices Quick Guide.
3.1.2 Preparation
PrerequisitesBefore you start installing this scenario, you must install prerequisite building blocks. For more information, see the Building Block Prerequisites Matrix for SAP Best Practices Baseline Package .
3.2.1 Define Forms - NF-e
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Output Define Forms
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Saída Definir formulários
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Forms”: Overview screen, choose New entries and enter the values shown below:
Form Form description
NF55 Nota Fiscal Eletronica
3. Choose Save.
4. Choose Back (F3).
3.2.2 Define Number Groups - NF-e
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Output Define Number Groups
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Saída Definir grupos de nºs
© SAP AGPage 184 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, choose New entries and enter the values shown below:
NF number group Description
1000EE 1000 – Incomming NF-e
1000ES 1000 – Outgoing NF-e
1100EE 1100 – Incomming NF-e
1100ES 1100 – Outgoing NF-e
1010EE 1010 – Incomming NF-e
1010ES 1010 – Outgoing NF-e
3. Choose Save.
4. Choose Back (F3).
3.2.3 Condition types for Output Determination –NF-e
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Output Determination Condition Types
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Determinação da saída Tipos de condição
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Output Types”: Overview screen, choose Display -> Change (Ctrl+F1) then choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries, enter the following values:
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Output type NF55
Description Form 1 - NFe
General data
Access sequence 0001
Access to conditions X – flag
Partner-indep. Output X – flag
Default values
Dispatch time 1 – Send with periodically sch.
Transmission Medium 1 – Print output
Storage system
Storage Mode 1 – Print only
Document type MMINOTAFIS
Partner-indep. Output X – flag
© SAP AGPage 185 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
4. Double-click on Mail title and texts to check if have information about e-mails.
5. Choose Processing routines, and choose New Entries.
6. On the New Entries: details of Added Entries, enter the following values:
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Transm. Medium 1 – Print output
Processing 1
Program ZNFE_PRINT_DANFE
Form Routine ENTRY
PDF/Smartform Form Z_NFDANFE_PORTRAIT_SAP This smart form will be defined from the company.
Form Type 1 - SmartForm
7. Choose Enter.
8. Choose Partner Function to see the customizing.
9. Choose Save.
10. Choose Back.
5.2.3.1 Condition types for Nota Fiscal Parallel Process (Optional)
UseThis activity must be customized if the company uses Nota Fiscal Parallel Process. This customizing it is not necessary to create an object.
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Output Determination Condition Types
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Determinação da saída Tipos de condição
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Output Types”: Overview screen, choose Display -> Change (Ctrl+F1) then choose Output type NF01 and chose with double-click Processing routines.
3. On the Change view “Processing routines”: Details, enter the following values:
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Processing 1
Program J_1BNFPR
Form Routine ENTRY
© SAP AGPage 186 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Field name Description User action and values Comment
PDF/Smartform Form Z_NFDANFE_PORTRAIT_SAP This smart form will be defined from the company.
Form J_1BNOTA_FISCAL
Processing 2
Program J_1BNFEXMLOUTPARALLEL
Form Routine ENTRY
Form
Processing 3
Program ZNFE_PRINT_DANFE
Form Routine ENTRY
Form
4. Choose Enter.
5. Choose Save.
3.2.4 Maintain Number Ranges for NF-e
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Electronic Notas Fiscaís (NF-e) Maintain Number Ranges for NF-e
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Notas fiscais eletrônicas (NF-e) Atualizar intervalos de numeração para NF-e
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Nota fiscal Electronica Number screen, on the field NF number group insert 1000ES and choose Change intervals.
3. Insert the intervals FROM NUMBER 000000001, TO NUMBER999999999.
4. Choose Save and repeat the steps with Group 1100ES and 1010ES.
5. Choose Back Twice.
3.2.5 Assign Numbering and Printing Parameters – NF-e
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Output Assign Numbering and Printing Parameters
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Saída Atribuir parêmetros de numeração e impressão
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “General Print Parameters”: Overview screen, select New entries.
© SAP AGPage 187 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3. On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter de following values:
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Company Code 1000
Business Place 0001
Nota Fiscal Form NF55 Nota Fiscal Electronic
General Data
NF Numbers 1000ES
Series 1
Lines head.msg 12
Item lines 7
Printer LOCL
NF-e
No. Range No. 01
Numbering Contin. X
Output Device LOCL
RFC Call 1
Ø Numbering, RFC call and data base update in the same LUW. Use for create NF-e number automatically.
1 Numbering & RFC is triggered via the Monitor Report( J1BNFE). Using button
.
2 Numbering in Monitor Report - RFC via batch report.
3 Numbering and RFC are triggered in the batch report J_1BRFCB.
4. Choose Save.
5. Execute the steps 3 and 4 using another Business Place (i.e. 0002).
6. Choose Back.
3.2.6 Output Determination Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Output Determination Output Determination Procedure
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Determinação da saída Esquema de mensagens
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Procedures”: Overview screen, mark NF0001 and choose with double-click Control data.
3. On the Change View “Control data”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following values:
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Step 30
© SAP AGPage 188 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Counter 1
CTyp Counter Type NF55 Form 1 – NF-e
5. Choose Save.
6. Choose Back.
3.2.7 Create Condition Record - NF-e
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Output Condition Records Create
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Saída Registros condição Criar
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Create Output – Condition Records: Nota fiscal screen, enter with the Output Type NF55 and choose Enter.
3. On the pop-up Key Combination select Condition tables for Output Nota Fiscal and choose Enter.
4. On the Create Condition Records (Form 1): Fast Entry screen, enter the following values:
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Company Code 1000
Business Place 0001
NF Form NF55 Nota Fiscal Electronica
5. Choose Enter.
6. Choose Communication or select double-click on NF Form.
7. On the Create Condition Records (Form 1): Communication screen, enter the following values:
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Output Device i.e. LOCL
Print Immediately X – Flag
SAP cover page Do Not Print
Storage Mode 1 – Print Only
8. Choose Save.
9. Choose Back Twice.
10. Repeat this procedure for Business Place 0002 and for Business Place 0003 – Company Code 1010.
3.2.8 Define Nota Fiscal Types
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
© SAP AGPage 189 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Define Nota Fiscal Types
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Definir tipos de nota fiscal
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Nota Fiscal Types”: Overview screen, choose New Entries to define the following Nota Fiscal Types:
If you have any code created before, please use another code, these codes are just suggestions to create a Nota fiscal category.
NF Category Lang Description
ZF EN Cancel Outgoing direction (A) – NF-e
PT Cancelamento saída (A) - NF-e
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
Document Type 5 Cancel
Direction of Movement Outgoing
3. Choose Save.
4. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
NF Category Lang Description
YH EN Cancel Incoming direction (A) – NF-e
PT Cancelamento entrada (A) - NF-e
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
Document Type 5 Cancel
Direction of Movement Incoming
5. Choose Save.
6. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
NF Category Lang Description
ZA EN Nota Fiscal Outgoing – NF-e
PT Nota Fiscal saída - NF-e
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
NF cancel type ZF - Cancel Outgoing direction (A)
Document Type 1 Nota Fiscal
Direction of Movement Outgoing
Other tab
Nota Fiscal form NF55 - Nota Fiscal Electronica
Nota Fiscal model 55 Nota Fiscal – Model 55
7. Choose Save.
© SAP AGPage 190 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
8. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
NF Category Lang Description
ZB EN Nota Fiscal Complementar of Outgoing
PT Complementar à nota fiscal de saída - NF
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
NF cancel type ZF - Cancel Outgoing direction (A)
Document Type 2 Complementar
Direction of Movement Outgoing
Other tab
Nota Fiscal form NF55 - Nota Fiscal Electronica
Nota Fiscal model 55 Nota Fiscal – Model 55
9. Choose Save.
10. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
NF Category Lang Description
ZC EN Nota Fiscal Correction of Outgoing – NF-e
PT Correção de nota fiscal de saída - NF-E
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
NF cancel type ZF - Cancel Outgoing direction (A)
Document Type 3 Correction
Direction of Movement Outgoing
11. Choose Save.
12. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
NF Category Lang Description
ZD EN Nota Fiscal Return of Outgoing – NF-e
PT Devolução NF de saída - NF-E
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
NF cancel type YH - Cancel Incoming direction (A)
Document Type 6 Return
Direction of Movement Incoming
Other tab
Nota Fiscal model 55 Nota Fiscal – Model 55
13. Choose Save.
14. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
© SAP AGPage 191 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
NF Category Lang Description
ZE EN Nota Fiscal Return of Outgoing (Entrada) – NF-e
PT Devolução NF de saída (entrada) - NF-e
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Nota Fiscal Entrada X – Flag
Electronic NF X – Flag
NF cancel type YH - Cancel Incoming direction (A)
Document Type 6 Return
Direction of Movement Incoming
Other tab
Nota Fiscal form NF55 - Nota Fiscal Electronica
Nota Fiscal model 55 Nota Fiscal – Model 55
15. Choose Save.
16. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
NF Category Lang Description
YA EN Nota Fiscal Incoming – NF-e
PT Nota fiscal entrada - NF-e
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
NF cancel type YH - Cancel Incoming direction (A)
Document Type 1 Nota Fiscal
Direction of Movement Incoming
NF partner function LF – Vendor
NF partner type V – Vendor
Other tab
Nota Fiscal model 55 Nota Fiscal – Model 55
17. Choose Save.
18. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
NF Category Lang Description
YB EN Nota Fiscal Return of Incoming – NF-e
PT Devolução (saída) à NF entrada - NF-e
© SAP AGPage 192 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
NF Category Lang Description
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
NF cancel type ZF - Cancel Outgoing direction (A)
Document Type 6 Return
Direction of Movement Outgoing
NF partner function LF – Vendor
NF partner type V – Vendor
Text key RETU - Return text for IPI
Other tab
Nota Fiscal form NF55 - Nota Fiscal Electronica
Nota Fiscal model 55 Nota Fiscal – Model 55
19. Choose Save.
20. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
NF Category Lang Description
YC EN Nota Fiscal Issue – NF-e
PT Nota fiscal saída de mercadorias - NF-e
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
NF cancel type ZF - Cancel Outgoing direction (A)
Document Type 1 Nota Fiscal
Direction of Movement Outgoing
Other tab
Nota Fiscal form NF55 - Nota Fiscal Electronica
Nota Fiscal model 55 Nota Fiscal – Model 55
21. Choose Save.
22. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
NF Category Lang Description
YD EN Nota Fiscal Return of Issue – NF-e
PT Devolução NF p/saída mercad. - NF-e
© SAP AGPage 193 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
NF Category Lang Description
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
NF cancel type YH - Cancel Incoming direction (A)
Document Type 6 Return
Direction of Movement Incoming
Other tab
Nota Fiscal model 55 Nota Fiscal – Model 55
23. Choose Save.
24. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
NF Category Lang Description
YE EN Nota Fiscal Receipt – NF-e
PT Nota fiscal entrada de mercadorias-NF-e
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
NF cancel type YH - Cancel Incoming direction (A)
Document Type 1 Nota Fiscal
Direction of Movement Incoming
Other tab
Nota Fiscal model 55 Nota Fiscal – Model 55
25. Choose Save.
26. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
NF Category Lang Description
YF EN Nota Fiscal Return of Receipt – NF-e
PT Devolução NF de entrada mercad.- NF-e
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
NF cancel type ZF - Cancel Outgoing direction (A)
Document Type 6 Return
Direction of Movement Outgoing
Other tab
Nota Fiscal form NF55 - Nota Fiscal Electronica
Nota Fiscal model 55 Nota Fiscal – Model 55
27. Choose Save.
28. Choose New Entries to enter the following values:
© SAP AGPage 194 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
NF Category Lang Description
YG EN Consignment – NF-e
PT Consignação - NF-e
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Electronic NF X – Flag
NF cancel type YH - Cancel Incoming direction (A)
Document Type 1 Nota Fiscal
Direction of Movement Incoming
NF partner function LF – Vendor
NF partner type V – Vendor
NF Item Type 51 Consignment invoice item
Other tab
Nota Fiscal model 55 Nota Fiscal – Model 55
29. Choose Save.
30. Choose Back.
3.2.9 Define NF Type Redetermination for Goods Movements
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Electronic Notas Fiscaís (NF-e) Define NF Type Redetermination for Goods Movements
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Notas fiscais eletrônicas (NF-e) Definir redeterminação do tipo de NF para movimentos de mercadorias
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “NF-e: NF Type determination for goods movements”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following values:
Plant Movement Type NF Type User Decision
541 YC
542 YD X
543 YE X
821 YE X
822 YF
833 YC
835 YE X
© SAP AGPage 195 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Plant Movement Type NF Type User Decision
861 YE X
862 YC
4. Save your entries.
5. Choose Back.
3.2.10 Defining Business Places
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal CNPJ Business Places Define Business Places
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Filial CNPJ Definir locais de negócio
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the pop-up Determine Work Area: Entry enter the Company Code and choose Enter.
3. On the Change View “Branch”: Overview screen, mark the Business Place on right side of screen and then select with double-click NFe Configuration.
4. Select New Entries.
5. On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values:
Field name Description User action and values Comment
NF model 55 Nota Fiscal – Model 55
Valid from (i.e. 20.10.2008) <current date>
System ID i.e. 2 Homologation (Test) You can use 1 Production.
SAP xNFe Active X
Destination i.e. SCICLNT100
XML Version 1,10
NFe Appl. Ver. SAP NFE 1.0
Value Normal 1
Value Conting, 2
Proc.Identific. 0 NF-e issued by contributors system
For. UF Value EX
For. CMUN Value 9999999
For. XMUN Value EXTERIOR
6. Choose Save.
7. Repeat steps for Company Code 1010.
8. Choose Back.
© SAP AGPage 196 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.2.11 Defining NF Type Redetermination per Business Place
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Sales and Distribution - Billing Documents Define NF Type Redetermination per Business Place
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Vendas e distribuição - documentos de faturamento Definir redeterminação do tipo de NF por local de negócio
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Nota Fiscal Type Redetermination per Business Place”: Ove screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries, enter the following values:
CoCd Bus. Place NT Alt. NFT
1000 0001 N1 ZA
1000 0001 N2 ZB
1000 0001 N3 ZC
1000 0001 N4 ZD
1000 0001 N5 ZE
1000 0002 N1 ZA
1000 0002 N2 ZB
1000 0002 N3 ZC
1000 0002 N4 ZD
1000 0002 N5 ZE
1010 0003 N1 ZA
1010 0003 N2 ZB
1010 0003 N3 ZC
1010 0003 N4 ZD
1010 0003 N5 ZE
4. Choose Save.
5. Choose Back.
3.2.12 Assign XML Version to Region
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Electronic Notas Fiscaís (NF-e) Assign XML Version to Region
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções
© SAP AGPage 197 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Notas fiscais eletrônicas (NF-e) Atribuir versão XML à região
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the pop-up Determine Work Area: Entry screen insert the Country Key (BR), choose Enter.
3. On the Change View “NF-e: Version of XML File”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4. On the field Region insert the state (i.e. SP), on field XML Vers. Insert the version of state (i.e. 1,10).
5. Choose Save.
6. Choose Back.
3.2.13 Defining SEFAZ Status Codes
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Electronic Notas Fiscaís (NF-e) Define SEFAZ Status Codes
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Notas fiscais eletrônicas (NF-e) Definir códigos de status SEFAZ
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “NF-e: Status Code Maintanance”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values shown below:
Stat Code Lang. Status Code Description
100 EN
PT Autorizado o uso da NF-e
101 EN
PT Cancelamento de NF-e homologado
102 EN
PT Inutilização de número homologado
103 EN
PT Lote recebido com sucesso
104 EN
PT Lote processado
105 EN
PT Lote em processamento
106 EN
PT Lote não localizado
107 EN
PT Serviço em Operação
© SAP AGPage 198 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Stat Code Lang. Status Code Description
108 EN
PT Serviço Paralisado Momentaneamente (curto prazo)
109 EN
PT Serviço Paralisado sem Previsão
110 EN
PT Uso Denegado
111 EN
PT Consulta cadastro com uma ocorrência
112 EN
PT Consulta cadastro com mais de uma ocorrência
201 EN
PT Rejeição: O numero máximo de numeração de NF-e a inutilizar ultrapassou o li
202 EN
PT Rejeição: Falha no reconhecimento da autoria ou integridade do arquivo digit
203 EN
PT Rejeição: Emissor não habilitado para emissão da NF-e
204 EN
PT Rejeição: Duplicidade de NF-e
205 EN
PT Rejeição: NF-e está denegada na base de dados da SEFAZ
206 EN
PT Rejeição: NF-e já está inutilizada na Base de dados da SEFAZ
207 EN
PT Rejeição: CNPJ do emitente inválido
208 EN
PT Rejeição: CNPJ do destinatário inválido
209 EN
PT Rejeição: IE do emitente inválida
210 EN
PT Rejeição: IE do destinatário inválida
211 EN
PT Rejeição: IE do substituto inválida
212 EN
PT Rejeição: Data de emissão NF-e posterior a data de recebimento
213 EN
© SAP AGPage 199 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Stat Code Lang. Status Code Description
PT Rejeição: CNPJ-Base do Emitente difere do CNPJ-Base do Certificado Digital
214 EN
PT Rejeição: Tamanho da mensagem excedeu o limite estabelecido
215 EN
PT Rejeição: Falha no schema XML
216 EN
PT Rejeição: Chave de Acesso difere da cadastrada
217 EN
PT Rejeição: NF-e não consta na base de dados da SEFAZ
218 EN
PT Rejeição: NF-e já esta cancelada na base de dados da SEFAZ
219 EN
PT Rejeição: Circulação da NF-e verificada
220 EN
PT Rejeição: NF-e autorizada há mais de 60 dias
221 EN
PT Rejeição: Confirmado o recebimento da NF-e pelo destinatário
222 EN
PT Rejeição: Protocolo de Autorização de Uso difere do cadastrado
223 EN
PT Rejeição: CNPJ do transmissor do lote difere do CNPJ do transmissor da consu
224 EN
PT Rejeição: A faixa inicial é maior que a faixa final
225 EN
PT Rejeição: Falha no Schema XML da NFe
226 EN
PT Rejeição: Código da UF do Emitente diverge da UF autorizadora
227 EN
PT Rejeição: Erro na Chave de Acesso - Campo ID
228 EN
PT Rejeição: Data de Emissão muito atrasada
229 EN
PT Rejeição: IE do emitente não informada
230 EN
PT Rejeição: IE do emitente não cadastrada
231 EN
© SAP AGPage 200 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Stat Code Lang. Status Code Description
PT Rejeição: IE do emitente não vinculada ao CNPJ
232 EN
PT Rejeição: IE do destinatário não informada
233 EN
PT Rejeição: IE do destinatário não cadastrada
234 EN
PT Rejeição: IE do destinatário não vinculada ao CNPJ
235 EN
PT Rejeição: Inscrição SUFRAMA inválida
236 EN
PT Rejeição: Chave de Acesso com dígito verificador inválido
237 EN
PT Rejeição: CPF do destinatário inválido
238 EN
PT Rejeição: Cabeçalho - Versão do arquivo XML superior a Versão vigente
239 EN
PT Rejeição: Cabeçalho - Versão do arquivo XML não suportada
240 EN
PT Rejeição: Cancelamento/Inutilização - Irregularidade Fiscal do Emitente
241 EN
PT Rejeição: Um número da faixa já foi utilizado
242 EN
PT Rejeição: Cabeçalho - Falha no Schema XML
243 EN
PT Rejeição: XML Mal Formado
244 EN
PT Rejeição: CNPJ do Certificado Digital difere do CNPJ da Matriz e do CNPJ do Emit
245 EN
PT Rejeição: CNPJ Emitente não cadastrado
246 EN
PT Rejeição: CNPJ Destinatário não cadastrado
247 EN
PT Rejeição: Sigla da UF do Emitente diverge da UF autorizadora
248 EN
PT Rejeição: UF do Recibo diverge da UF autorizadora
© SAP AGPage 201 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Stat Code Lang. Status Code Description
249 EN
PT Rejeição: UF da Chave de Acesso diverge da UF autorizadora
250 EN
PT Rejeição: UF diverge da UF autorizadora
251 EN
PT Rejeição: UF/Município destinatário não pertence a SUFRAMA
252 EN
PT Rejeição: Ambiente informado diverge do Ambiente de recebimento
253 EN
PT Rejeição: Digito Verificador da chave de acesso composta inválida
254 EN
PT Rejeição: NF-e referenciada não informada para NF-e complementar
255 EN
PT Rejeição: Informada mais de uma NF-e referenciada para NF-e complementar
256 EN
PT Rejeição: Uma NF-e da faixa já está inutilizada na Base de dados da SEFAZ
257 EN
PT Rejeição: Solicitante não habilitado para emissão da NF-e
258 EN
PT Rejeição: CNPJ da consulta inválido
259 EN
PT Rejeição: CNPJ da consulta não cadastrado como contribuinte na UF
260 EN
PT Rejeição: IE da consulta inválida
261 EN
PT Rejeição: IE da consulta não cadastrada como contribuinte na UF
262 EN
PT Rejeição: UF não fornece consulta por CPF
263 EN
PT Rejeição: CPF da consulta inválido
264 EN
PT Rejeição: CPF da consulta não cadastrado como contribuinte na UF
265 EN
PT Rejeição: Sigla da UF da consulta difere da UF do Web Service
© SAP AGPage 202 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Stat Code Lang. Status Code Description
266 EN
PT Rejeição: Série utilizada não permitida no Web Service
267 EN
PT Rejeição: NF Complementar referencia uma NF-e inexistente
268 EN
PT Rejeição: NF Complementar referencia uma outra NF-e Complementar
269 EN
PT Rejeição: CNPJ Emitente da NF Complementar difere do CNPJ da NF Referenciada
270 EN
PT Rejeição: Código Município do Fato Gerador: dígito inválido
271 EN
PT Rejeição: Código Município do Fato Gerador: difere da UF do emitente
272 EN
PT Rejeição: Código Município do Emitente: dígito inválido
273 EN
PT Rejeição: Código Município do Emitente: difere da UF do emitente
274 EN
PT Rejeição: Código Município do Destinatário: dígito inválido
275 EN
PT Rejeição: Código Município do Destinatário: difere da UF do Destinatário
276 EN
PT Rejeição: Código Município do Local de Retirada: dígito inválido
277 EN
PT Rejeição: Código Município do Local de Retirada: difere da UF do Local de Retir.
278 EN
PT Rejeição: Código Município do Local de Entrega: dígito inválido
279 EN
PT Rejeição: Código Município do Local de Entrega: difere da UF do Local de Entrada
280 EN
PT Rejeição: Certificado Transmissor inválido
281 EN
PT Rejeição: Certificado Transmissor Data Validade
282 EN
© SAP AGPage 203 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Stat Code Lang. Status Code Description
PT Rejeição: Certificado Transmissor sem CNPJ
283 EN
PT Rejeição: Certificado Transmissor - erro Cadeia de Certificação
284 EN
PT Rejeição: Certificado Transmissor revogado
285 EN
PT Rejeição: Certificado Transmissor difere ICP-Brasil
286 EN
PT Rejeição: Certificado Transmissor erro no acesso a LCR
287 EN
PT Rejeição: Código Município do FG - ISSQN: dígito inválido
288 EN
PT Rejeição: Código Município do FG - Transporte: dígito inválido
289 EN
PT Rejeição: Código da UF informada diverge da UF solicitada
290 EN
PT Rejeição: Certificado Assinatura inválido
291 EN
PT Rejeição: Certificado Assinatura Data Validade
293 EN
PT Rejeição: Certificado Assinatura - erro Cadeia de Certificação
294 EN
PT Rejeição: Certificado Assinatura revogado
295 EN
PT Rejeição: Certificado Assinatura difere ICP-Brasil
296 EN
PT Rejeição: Certificado Assinatura erro no acesso a LCR
297 EN
PT Rejeição: Assinatura difere do calculado
298 EN
PT Rejeição: Assinatura difere do padrão do Projeto
299 EN
PT Rejeição: XML da área de cabeçalho com codificação diferente de UTF-8
301 EN
PT Uso Denegado : Irregularidade fiscal do emitente
302 EN
PT Uso Denegado : Irregularidade fiscal do destinatário
© SAP AGPage 204 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Stat Code Lang. Status Code Description
401 EN
PT Rejeição: CPF do remetente inválido
402 EN
PT Rejeição: XML da área de dados com codificação diferente de UTF-8
403 EN
PT Rejeição: O grupo de informações da NF-e avulsa é de uso exclusivo do Fisco
404 EN
PT Rejeição: Uso de prefixo de namespace não permitido
405 EN
PT Rejeição: Código do país do emitente: dígito inválido
406 EN
PT Rejeição: Código do país do destinatário: dígito inválido
407 EN
PT Rejeição: O CPF só pode ser informado no campo emitente para a NF-e avulsa
999 EN
PT Rejeição: Erro ñ catalogado (inf. msg. de erro capturado no tratamento exceção)
4. Save your entries.
5. Choose Back (F3).
3.2.14 Defining Cancellation Reasons
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Electronic Notas Fiscaís (NF-e) Define Cancellation Reasons
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Notas fiscais eletrônicas (NF-e) Definir motivos de estorno
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “NFe: Reason for Cancel/Skip”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter for the values shown below:
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Cancel Reason 01
Logistic Invoice 01
Description Nota Fiscal Electronica Cancel.
© SAP AGPage 205 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
4. Save your entries and return to the Change View “NFe: Reason for Cancel/Skip”: Overview screen.
5. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Cancel Reason 02
Logistic Invoice 02
Description Nota Fiscal Electronica Cancel.
Cancel Reason 03
Logistic Invoice 03
Description Nota Fiscal Electronica Cancel.
Cancel Reason 04
Logistic Invoice 04
Description Nota Fiscal Electronica Cancel.
Cancel Reason 05
Logistic Invoice 05
Description Nota Fiscal Electronica Cancel.
6. Save your entries.
7. Choose Back.
3.2.15 Defining IPI Tax Situations
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil Define IPI Tax Situations
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Configs.globais Brasil Definir situação fiscal IPI
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Tax situation IPI” Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the values shown below:
Tax sit. Lang Description
0 EN Incoming with IPI credit
PT Entrada com recuperação de crédito
1 EN Incoming with tax rate = zero
PT Entrada tributada com alíquota zero
2 EN Incoming exempt of IPI
PT Entrada isenta
3 EN Incoming not taxed by IPI
PT Entrada não tributada
4 EN Incoming - IPI immune
© SAP AGPage 206 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Tax sit. Lang Description
PT Entrada imune
5 EN Incoming with suspension (ato cotepe 70)
PT Entrada com suspensão
49 EN Other incomings
PT Outras entradas
50 EN Outgoing taxed by IPI
PT Saída tributada
51 EN Outgoing IPI tax rate = zero
PT Saída tributada com alíquota zero
52 EN Outgoing exempt of IPI
PT Saída isenta
53 EN Outgoing IPI not taxed
PT Saída não tributada
54 EN Outgoin - IPI immune
PT Saída imune
55 EN Outgoing IPI suspension
PT Saída com suspensão
99 EN Other outgoings
PT Outras saídas
4. Save your entries.
5. Choose Back.
3.2.16 Defining PIS Tax Situations
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil Define PIS Tax Situations
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Configs.globais Brasil Definir situações fiscais PIS
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Tax situation PIS” Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the values shown below:
Tax sit. Lang Description
01 EN Tax due (tax base is NF total / normal tax rate / cumulative
PT Operação Tributável (base cálc=vlr oper. alíq.normal (cumula
02 EN Tax due (tax base is NF total / special tax rate)
PT Operação Tributável (base cálc=vlr oper.(aliq.diferenciada))
© SAP AGPage 207 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Tax sit. Lang Description
03 EN Tax due (tax base is quantity sold x rate per product unit)
PT Operação Tributável (base cálc=quant.vend X Aliq. Un. Prod.)
04 EN Tax due (Monofásico / tax rate is zero)
PT Operação Tributável (tributação monofásica (alíquota zero))
05 EN No description exists
PT Sem descrições
06 EN Tax due (tax rate is zero)
PT Operação Tributável (alíquota zero)
07 EN Tax exempt
PT Operação Isenta da Contribuição
08 EN Tax not due
PT Operação Sem Incidência da Contribuição
09 EN Tax suspension
PT Operação com Suspensão da Contribuição
99 EN Others
PT Outras saídas
4. Choose Save.
5. Choose Back.
3.2.17 Defining COFINS Tax Situations
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil Define COFINS Tax Situations
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Configs.globais Brasil Definir situações fiscais COFINS
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Tax situation COFINS” Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the values shown below:
Tax sit. Lang Description
01 EN Tax due (tax base is NF total / normal tax rate / cumulative
PT Operação Tributável (base cálc=vlr oper. alíq.normal (cumula
02 EN Tax due (tax base is NF total / special tax rate)
PT Operação Tributável (base cálc=vlr oper.(aliq.diferenciada))
03 EN Tax due (tax base is quantity sold x rate per product unit)
PT Operação Tributável (base cálc=quant.vend X Aliq. Un. Prod.)
© SAP AGPage 208 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Tax sit. Lang Description
04 EN Tax due (Monofásico / tax rate is zero)
PT Operação Tributável (tributação monofásica (alíquota zero))
05 EN No description exists
PT Sem descrições
06 EN Tax due (tax rate is zero)
PT Operação Tributável (alíquota zero)
07 EN Tax exempt
PT Operação Isenta da Contribuição
08 EN Tax not due
PT Operação Sem Incidência da Contribuição
09 EN Tax suspension
PT Operação com Suspensão da Contribuição
99 EN Others
PT Outras Operações
4. Save your entries.
3.2.18 Defining IPI Tax Laws
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil Define IPI Tax Laws
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Configs.globais Brasil Definir lei fiscal IPI
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Tax Law IPI” Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the values shown below:
IPI law Lang Description
I00 EN Incoming with IPI credit
PT Entrada com recuperação de crédito \ Saída Tributada
© SAP AGPage 209 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
IPI law Lang Description
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. IPI In 0 - Incoming with IPI credit
Tax Sit. IPI Ou 50 - Outgoing taxed by IPI
LAW tab Texts
Line 1 i.e. 00-Incoming with IPI credit 111111
Line 2 i.e. 00-Incoming with IPI credit 2222222
Line 3 i.e. 00-Incoming with IPI credit 3333333333
Line 4 i.e. 00-Incoming with IPI credit 444444444444
On the LAW tab tests you will insert the tests to be appear on the Nota Fiscal Electronica, to be sure what is the right test, you must ask your finance department.
4. Save your entries.
5. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
IPI law Lang Description
I01 EN Incoming with tax rate = zero
PT Entrada \ Saída tributada com alíquota zero
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. IPI In 1 - Incoming with tax rate= zero
Tax Sit. IPI Ou 51 - Outgoing IPI tax rate= zero
LAW tab Texts
Line 1 i.e. 01-Incoming with tax rate = zero 51 -1
Line 2 i.e. 01-Incoming with tax rate = zero 51 -2
Line 3 i.e. 01-Incoming with tax rate = zero 51 -3
Line 4 i.e. 01-Incoming with tax rate = zero 51 -4
6. Save your entries.
7. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
IPI law Lang Description
I02 EN Incoming exempt of IPI
PT Entrada \ Saída isenta
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. IPI In 2 - Incoming exempt of IPI
Tax Sit. IPI Ou 52 - Outgoing exempt of IPI
LAW tab Texts
Line 1 i.e. 02-Incoming exempt of IPI 52 -1
Line 2 i.e. 02-Incoming exempt of IPI 52 -2
Line 3 i.e. 02-Incoming exempt of IPI 52 -3
Line 4 i.e. 02-Incoming exempt of IPI 52 -4
8. Save your entries.
© SAP AGPage 210 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
9. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
IPI law Lang Description
I03 EN Incoming not taxed by IPI
PT Entrada \ Saída não tributada
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. IPI In 3 - Incoming not taxed by IPI
Tax Sit. IPI Ou 53 - Outgoing IPI not taxed
LAW tab Texts
Line 1 i.e. 03-Incoming not taxed by IPI 53 -1
Line 2 i.e. 03-Incoming not taxed by IPI 53 -2
Line 3 i.e. 03-Incoming not taxed by IPI 53 -3
Line 4 i.e. 03-Incoming not taxed by IPI 53 -4
10. Save your entries.
11. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
IPI law Lang Description
I04 EN Incoming - IPI immune
PT Entrada \ Saída imune
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. IPI In 4 - Incoming - IPI immune
Tax Sit. IPI Ou 54 - Outgoin - IPI immune
LAW tab Texts
Line 1 i.e. 04-Incoming - IPI immune 54 -1
Line 2 i.e. 04-Incoming - IPI immune 54 -2
Line 3 i.e. 04-Incoming - IPI immune 54 -3
Line 4 i.e. 04-Incoming - IPI immune 54 -4
12. Save your entries.
13. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
IPI law Lang Description
I05 EN Incoming with suspension (ato cotepe 70)
PT Entrada \ Saída com suspensão
© SAP AGPage 211 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
IPI law Lang Description
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. IPI In 5 - Incoming with suspension (ato cotepe 70)
Tax Sit. IPI Ou 55 - Outgoing IPI suspension
LAW tab Texts
Line 1 i.e. 05 - Incoming with suspension (ato cotepe 70) 55 -1
Line 2 i.e. 05 - Incoming with suspension (ato cotepe 70) 55 -2
Line 3 i.e. 05 - Incoming with suspension (ato cotepe 70) 55 -3
Line 4 i.e. 05 - Incoming with suspension (ato cotepe 70) 55 -4
14. Save your entries.
15. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
IPI law Lang Description
I49 EN Other incomings
PT Outras Entradas \ Saídas
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. IPI In 49 - Other incomings
Tax Sit. IPI Ou 99 -Other outgoings
LAW tab Texts
Line 1 i.e. 49-Other incomings
Line 2 i.e. b49 - line 2 =========
Line 3 i.e. b49 - line 3 =========
Line 4 i.e. b49 - line 4 =========
16. Save your entries.
17. Choose Back.
3.2.19 Defining PIS Tax Laws
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil Define PIS Tax Laws
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Configs.globais Brasil Definir convenções fiscais PIS
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Tax Law PIS” Overview screen, select the option New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the values shown below:
© SAP AGPage 212 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
PIS law Lang Description
P01 EN Tax Due (base amount = total value of normal tax rate) = 01
PT Operação Tributável (base cálc=vlr oper. alíq.normal (cumula
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. PIS 01
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
4. Save your entries.
5. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
PIS law Lang Description
P02 EN Tax Due (base amount = total value (dif tax rate) = 02
PT Operação Tributável (base cálc=vlr oper.(aliq.diferenciada))
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. PIS 02
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
6. Save your entries.
7. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
PIS law Lang Description
P03 EN Tax Due (base amount = sale qty x tax rate per base uni = 03
PT Operação Tributável (base cálc=quant.vend X Aliq. Un. Prod.)
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. PIS 03
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
8. Save your entries.
9. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
PIS law Lang Description
P04 EN Tax Due (monophasic situation (tax rate = zero) = 04
© SAP AGPage 213 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
PIS law Lang Description
PT Operação Tributável (tributação monofásica (alíquota zero))
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. PIS 04
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
10. Save your entries.
11. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
PIS law Lang Description
P05 EN No description exists
PT Sem descrições
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. PIS 05
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
12. Save your entries.
13. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
PIS law Lang Description
P06 EN Tax Due (tax rate zero) = 06
PT Operação Tributável (alíquota zero)
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. PIS 06
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
14. Save your entries.
15. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
PIS law Lang Description
P07 EN No Tax = 07
PT Operação Isenta da Contribuição
© SAP AGPage 214 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
PIS law Lang Description
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. PIS 07
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
16. Save your entries.
17. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
PIS law Lang Description
P08 EN No Tax (no Incidence) = 08
PT Operação Sem Incidência da Contribuição
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. PIS 08
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
18. Save your entries.
19. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
PIS law Lang Description
P09 EN No Tax (suspension) = 09
PT Operação com Suspensão da Contribuição
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. PIS 09
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
20. Save your entries.
21. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
PIS law Lang Description
P99 EN Others = 99
PT Outras Operações
© SAP AGPage 215 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
PIS law Lang Description
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. PIS 99
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
22. Save your entries.
23. Choose Back.
3.2.20 Defining COFINS Tax Laws
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil Define PIS Tax Laws
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Configs.globais Brasil Definir convenções fiscais PIS
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Tax Law COFINS” Overview screen, select the option New Entries.
3. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the values shown below:
COFINS law Lang Description
C01 EN Tax Due (base amount = total value of normal tax rate) = 01
PT Operação Tributável (base cálc=vlr oper. alíq.normal (cumula
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. COFINS 01
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
4. Save your entries.
5. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
COFINS law Lang Description
C02 EN Tax Due (base amount = total value (dif tax rate)) = 02
PT Operação Tributável (base cálc=vlr oper.(aliq.diferenciada))
© SAP AGPage 216 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
COFINS law Lang Description
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. COFINS 02
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
6. Save your entries.
7. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
COFINS law Lang Description
C03 EN Tax Due (base amount = sale qty x tax rate per base unit =03
PT Operação Tributável (base cálc=quant.vend X Aliq. Un. Prod.)
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. COFINS 03
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
8. Save your entries.
9. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
COFINS law Lang Description
C04 EN Tax Due (monophasic situation (tax rate = zero)) = 04
PT Operação Tributável (tributação monofásica (alíquota zero))
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. COFINS 04
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
10. Save your entries.
11. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
COFINS law Lang Description
C05 EN No description exists 05
PT Sem descrições
© SAP AGPage 217 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
COFINS law Lang Description
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. COFINS 05
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
12. Save your entries.
13. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
COFINS law Lang Description
C06 EN Tax Due (tax rate zero) = 06
PT Operação Tributável (alíquota zero)
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. COFINS 06
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
14. Save your entries.
15. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
COFINS law Lang Description
C07 EN No Tax = 07
PT Operação Isenta da Contribuição
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. COFINS 07
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
16. Save your entries.
17. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
COFINS law Lang Description
C08 EN No Tax (no Incidence) = 08
PT Operação Sem Incidência da Contribuição
© SAP AGPage 218 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
COFINS law Lang Description
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. COFINS 08
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
18. Save your entries.
19. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
COFINS law Lang Description
C09 EN No Tax (suspension)
PT Operação com Suspensão da Contribuição
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. COFINS 09
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
20. Save your entries.
21. Repeat step 2 to 3 and enter the values shown below:
COFINS law Lang Description
C99 EN Others = 99
PT Outras Operações
Field name Description User action and values Comment
Tax Sit. COFINS 99
LAW tab Texts
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
22. Choose Save.
23. Choose Back.
3.2.21 Maintain Tax Law PIS/COFINS
Procedure2. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Basic Settings (New)
© SAP AGPage 219 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Define FI/MM Tax Codes
Menu IMGContabilidade financeira (novo) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Definir código de imposto FI/MM
Transaction Code SPRO
3. On the Determine Work Area:Entry screen, entry the value TAXBRA.
4. On the Change View “ MaintainTax Codes”: Overview make the following entries:
Tax Code Description COFINS Law Usage
A0 Out. Indust.: ICMS C07 P07
A1 Out. Indust.: ICMS C07 P07
A3 Out. Indust.: ICMS + IPI C07 P07
C0 In. Cons.: No tax C07 P07
C1 In. Cons.: ICMS + CompICMS C07 P07
C2In. Consumption: ICMS + CompICMS + S.T. C07 P07
C3 In. Cons.: ICMS + CompICMS + IPI C07 P07
C4 In. Cons.: ICMS + CompICMS + S.T. + IPI C07 P07
C5 In. Cons.: IPI C07 P07
I0 In. Indust.: No tax C07 P07
I1 In. Indust.: ICMS C07 P07
I2 In. Indust.: ICMS + S.T. C07 P07
I3 In. Indust.: ICMS + IPI C07 P07
I4 In. Indust.: ICMS + S.T. + IPI C07 P07
I5 In. Indust.: IPI C07 P07
I6 In. Indust.: ICMS + IPI: Reselling C07 P07
I7 In. Indust.: ICMS + S.T. + IPI: Reselling C07 P07
I9 In. ISS C07 P07
S0 Output SD tax: No tax C07 P07
SD Output SD tax: ICMS/IPI/Sub.Trib. C07 P07
SE Output SD: Tax exempt transactions C07 P07
SI Output SD tax: ISS C07 P07
SZ Output SD tax: ICMS Zona Franca C07 P07
Y1Industrialization: Only ICMS-PIS/COFINS deductible C01 P01
Y3Industrialization: ICMS/IPI/PIS/COFINS deductible C01 P01
Z1Industrialization: ICMS-PIS/COFINS non deductible C01 P01
Z3Industrialization: ICMS/IPI/PIS/COFINS deduct C01 P01
© SAP AGPage 220 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.2.22 Maintain Tax Law PIS/COFINS SD
Procedure2. Access the activity using the following navigation options:
IMG MenuSales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Country-specific Features Country-specific Features for Brazil Maintain Sales Document Item Category
IMG MenuVendas e distribuição Faturamento Documentos de faturamento Características especiais do país Propriedades específicas de país – Brasil Atualizar ctg.item doc.vendas
Transaction Code SPRO
3. Enter the following data:
Sales Doc Type Item category COFINS Law PIS Law
CRB G2N C01 P01
CRB G2W C01 P01
DRB L2N C01 P01
DRB L2W C01 P01
ORB TANN C01 P01
ORB TAPS C01 P01
ORB TBB C01 P01
ORB TBD C01 P01
ORB TBLL C01 P01
ORB TBN C01 P01
ORB TBX C01 P01
ORB YBAB C01 P01
ORB YBTC C01 P01
REB LBNL C01 P01
REB RBB C01 P01
REB RBN C01 P01
REB RENN C01 P01
ROB LBNL C01 P01
ROB RBB C01 P01
ROB RBN C01 P01
ROB RENN C01 P01
VDOR TBS C01 P01
VDOR YB1 C01 P01
VDOR YB2 C01 P01
© SAP AGPage 221 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3.2.23 Defining Screen Control Groups
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu n/a
Menu IMG n/a
Transaction Code SM30
2. On the Maintain Tables Views: Initial screen on field Table/View, insert the table J_1BAMV.
3. Choose Maintain, if an information pop-up appears, choose Enter to confirm.
4. Mark the Screen Control reference number 5 (five) and choose Copy as… .
5. On the Change View “Screen control groups”: Details of Selected Set screen, mark the field 4 Nota Fiscal Number as Optional.
6. Describe the new description for this Screen Control reference i.e. Z1 - Create incoming NF manually.
7. Choose Save.
8. Choose Back.
9. Choose the Screen Control reference number 3 (trhee) with double-click.
10. On field 79 marks as Optional.
11. Choose Save.
12. Choose Back.
13. Choose the Screen Control reference number 8 (eight) with double-click.
14. On field 79 marks as Optional.
15. Choose Save.
16. Choose Back.
17. Mark the Screen Control reference number 9 (nine) and choose Copy as… .
18. On the Change View “Screen control groups”: Details of Selected Set screen, mark the field 4 Nota Fiscal Number as Optional.
19. Describe the new description for this Screen Control reference i.e. Z2 - Change incoming NF-e manually.
20. On field 79 marks as Optional.
21. Choose Save.
22. Choose Back.
23. Mark the Screen Control reference number 10 (ten) and choose Copy as… .
© SAP AGPage 222 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
24. On the Change View “Screen control groups”: Details of Selected Set screen, mark the field 4 Nota Fiscal Number as Optional.
Describe the new description for this Screen Control reference i.e. Z3 - Create incoming NF-e automatically.
25. On field 79 marks as Optional.
26. Choose Save.
27. Choose Back.
28. Mark the Screen Control reference number 8 (eight) and choose Copy as… .
29. On the Change View “Screen control groups”: Details of Selected Set screen, mark the field 4 Nota Fiscal Number as Optional.
30. Describe the new description for this Screen Control reference i.e. Z4 - Change incoming NF-e automatically.
31. On field 79 marks as Optional.
32. Choose Save.
33. Choose Back.
3.2.24 Assigning Screen Control Group
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Cross-Application Components General Application Functions Nota fiscal Maintenance Screen Control Group Assignment
Menu IMG Componentes válidos para várias aplicações Funções gerais de aplicação Nota fiscal Atualização Atribuição de grupo de controle de tela
Transaction Code SPRO
2. On the Change View “Screen Control for Group Assignment” Overview screen, select every NF Type and choose Copy As…
From NF Type To NF Type
N1 i.e. ZA
N2 i.e. ZB
N3 i.e. ZC
N4 i.e. ZD
N5 i.e. ZE
A2 i.e. ZF
E1 i.e. YA
E4 i.e. YB
G1 i.e. YC
G4 i.e. YD
© SAP AGPage 223 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
From NF Type To NF Type
R1 i.e. YE
R4 i.e. YF
X2 i.e. YG
A1 i.e. YH
3. Choose Save.
4. Insert the new screen control reference Z2 to NF Type YA create with the field “Manual” empty.
5. Insert the new screen control reference Z1 to NF Type YA create with the field “Manual” selected.
6. Insert the new screen control reference Z3 to NF Type YE create.
7. Insert the new screen control reference Z4 to NF Type YE change.
8. Choose Save.
9. Choose Back.
3.2.25 CBT: Mapping of SubTrip Base Reduction
5.2.25.1 Create New Conditions for MM and SD
Procedure
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Access Tax Manager's Workplace
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Chamar Tax Administration Tool
Transaction Code J1BTAX
2. On the Tax Manager’s Workplace Brazil screen, choose top menu Condition setup Condition typesCondition Types MM.
3. On the Change View “Conditions: Condition Types”: Overview screen, mark the condition type BX44 and choose Copy As..
Copy BX44 to BX45 – Short text: BRSubTrib NF Basred1
Copy BX45 to BX46 – Short text: BRSubTrib NF Basred2
4. Choose Save.
5. Choose Back.
6. Execute the steps 2 to 5 with Condition Types SD.
5.2.25.2 Maintain Calculation Procedure TAXBRA / YVABRA
Procedure
© SAP AGPage 224 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Access Tax Manager's Workplace
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Chamar Tax Administration Tool
Transaction Code J1BTAX
2. On the Tax Manager’s Workplace Brazil screen, choose top menu Condition setup Condition types Calc. Procedures Calc. Procedures MM.
3. On the Change View “Procedures”: Overview screen, select the procedure TAXBRA and select with double-click Control Data on left side of screen.
4. On the Change View “Control Data”: Overview screen, create a new condition BX45 as copy from step BX44, and another condition BX46 as copy from step BX45.
5. Repeat the same steps for SD calculation with procedure YVABRA.
If you have just one step available, you can use the same step number, i.e.645, and use counter field to put in sequence, i.e. step: 645 counter: 0 for BX45 an step: 645 counter: 1 for BX46.
6. Choose Save.
7. Choose Back.
5.2.25.3 Create New Internal Codes1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Access Tax Manager's Workplace
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Chamar Tax Administration Tool
Transaction Code J1BTAX
2. On the Tax Manager’s Workplace Brazil screen, choose top menu Condition setup Condition types Condition Mapping Internal Codes.
3. On the Change View “Internal Codes for Tax Conditions”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following values below:
Internal TC Code Description
NF_SUBTRIB_BASERED1 Federal base reduction Rate for Subtrib
NF_SUBTRIB_BASERED2 State base reduction Rate for Subtrib
5. Choose Save.
6. Choose Back.
© SAP AGPage 225 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
5.2.25.4 Assing Internal Codes to Conditions1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Settings for Tax Calculation in Brazil Access Tax Manager's Workplace
Menu IMG Contabilidade financeira (nv.) Configurações globais contabilidade financeira (novo) IVA Cálculo Opções para cálculo de impostos no Brasil Chamar Tax Administration Tool
Transaction Code J1BTAX
2. On the Tax Manager’s Workplace Brazil screen, choose top menu Condition setup Condition types Condition Mapping Assing Conditions to Internal Codes.
3. On the Change View “Map Internal Codes for Tax Conditions to Condition Types” screen, choose New Entries.
4. On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following values below:
Internal TC Code Application Condition Type
NF_SUBTRIB_BASERED1 TX BX45
NF_SUBTRIB_BASERED1 V BX45
NF_SUBTRIB_BASERED2 TX BX46
NF_SUBTRIB_BASERED2 V BX46
5. Choose Save.
6. Choose Back.
3.2.26 Defining Tax Jurisdiction Codes
ProcedureTo customize this step you must use the document Defining Tax Jurisdiction Codes.doc
3.2.27 Assigning Postal Codes to Tax Jurisdiction Codes
ProcedureTo customize this step you must use the document Assigning Postal Codes to Tax Jurisdiction Codes.doc
3.2.28 Contingency Rules for Plant
Procedure1. Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu N/A
Menu IMG N/A
Transaction Code J1BNFE
2. On the NF-e Monitor screen, go to the top menu ContingencyContingency: Bus. Pl.
© SAP AGPage 226 of 227
SAP Best Practices Sales and Distribution (105): Configuration Guide
3. On the Change view “NF-e: Contingency for Business Places”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4. There are four possible ways to put the Business Place under contingency, as follow picture:
Example 1000: The system try to conect to Messaging System if there is no answer then the system flag the first row MS Down and then NF-e will be created with field Conting marked with X and the next will be created without if the Messaging System working.
Example 1001: The system try to conect to Messaging System if there is no answer then the system flag the first row MS Down and then NF-e will be created with field Conting marked with X until the user unflagging the field on the first row.
Example 1002: When the user flag the first row, the system will create all NF-e until the user unflagging it.
Example 1003: All NF-e will be created, but will not send to SEFAZ and will stay on NF-e Monitor until the user sends them. Will be printed only when has a SEFAZ authorization.
That rules must be created for every plant, if you create a new plant, you must atribute those rules.
6 AppendixDeletion of standard customizing:
We do not recommend the deletion of standard customizing (for example Order Types).
The attached Excel File provides an overview of the most important SD customizing settings used in SAP Best Practices. Never delete any of these settings. Deleting of other settings happens at your own risk.
© SAP AGPage 227 of 227
Top Related